>> Owner's Manual smart EQ fortwo and smart EQ fortwo cabrio Symbols in the Owner's Manual The following symbols are used in this Own- er's Manual: G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i These symbols indicate useful instruc- tions or further information that could be helpful to you. X Instructions that must be followed. X Several consecutive symbols indicate an instruction with several consecutive steps. (Y page) Further information on a topic YY A warning or an instruction that is con- tinued on the next page. Display text: Display text in the instru- ment cluster display, the smart Audio-Sys- tem or the smart Media-System. About this Owner's Manual your vehicle and multimedia system Before you first drive off, read this Owner's online on your phone or as a download Manual carefully and familiarise yourself regardless of the status of your network with your vehicle. For your own safety and a connection. Available for smartphones longer vehicle life, follow the instructions or tablets. and warning notices in this manual. Disre- QR codes for the smart guides app. garding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. This Owner's Manual provides information on the most important functions of your vehicle. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: RModel Apple® iOS ROrder RCountry variant RAvailability The illustrations in this manual show a left- hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and con- trols differs accordingly. smart is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. Android™ smart therefore reserves the right to intro- Please note that the smart guides app may duce changes in the following areas: not currently be available in your country. RDesign REquipment RTechnical features Therefore, the description may differ from your vehicle in some cases. Integral parts of the vehicle include: ROwner's Manual RService Booklet REquipment-dependent Supplements These documents should be kept in the vehi- cle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Your Owner's Manuals: Digital on the Internet The Owner's Manual on the Internet provides you with convenient access to all the information relevant to your vehicle and multimedia system. It also offers helpful animations, exciting background information and a wide variety of search options. Digital as an app Using the smart guides app, you can call up all of the information relevant to

4535844314 É4535844314[ËÍ

2 Contents

Radar-based recuperation ...... 65 Index ...... 4 Driving economically ...... 66 Braking correctly ...... 69 Introduction ...... 20 Driving on wet roads ...... 70 Protecting the environment ...... 20 Winter driving ...... 70 smart genuine parts ...... 20 Lane Keeping Assist ...... 70 Warranty for the smart Audio-Sys- Cruise control and limiter ...... 71 tem and smart Media-System ...... 21 Charging the high-voltage battery ..... 72 Vehicle equipment ...... 21 Operating safety ...... 21 Ensuring good visibility ...... 82 QR codes for rescue card ...... 26 Switching on the lighting ...... 82 Data stored in the vehicle ...... 26 Adjusting the lighting ...... 83 Copyright information ...... 28 Using the interior lighting ...... 84 Using the windscreen wipers ...... 84 At a glance ...... 29 Folding the sun visor to the side ...... 86 Cockpit ...... 29 Multifunction steering wheel ...... 30 Feeling comfortable in the vehicle Centre console with drawer ...... 31 interior ...... 87 Overhead control panel ...... 32 Locking and unlocking the doors Door control panel ...... 33 from the inside ...... 87 Displays shown in the instrument Understanding the reversing fea- cluster and the display ...... 34 ture ...... 88 Opening and closing the windows ...... 88 Safety ...... 35 Using the soft top (smart fortwo Occupant safety ...... 35 cabrio) ...... 89 Travelling safely with children in Fitting and removing the draught the vehicle ...... 41 stop (smart fortwo cabrio) ...... 92 Pets in the vehicle ...... 54 Operating the climate control sys- Driving safely ...... 54 tem ...... 92 Activating/deactivating the seat heating and steering wheel heating ... 95 Entering and setting up ...... 57 Using the accessories ...... 96 Understanding functions of the key ... 57 Opening the door ...... 57 Correct driver's seat position ...... 57 Parking and getting out ...... 98 Adjusting the seats ...... 58 Parking ...... 98 Adjusting the steering wheel ...... 59 Using the parking aid ...... 98 Adjusting the mirrors ...... 60 Using the reversing camera ...... 99 Using the armrest ...... 61 Locking the vehicle ...... 101 Priming and deactivating the anti- theft alarm system ...... 101 Driving ...... 62 Starting the engine ...... 62 Pulling away ...... 62 Operating the on-board computer ..... 102 Automatic transmission ...... 64 Overview of the on-board computer .. 102 Using the turn signals ...... 65 Calling up displays ...... 103 Acoustic presence indicator ...... 65 Setting values ...... 105 Contents 3

Changing the window wiper blades .. 160 Using the smart Audio-System ...... 108 Cleaning the vehicle ...... 161 Operating and setting the smart Observing service due dates ...... 165 Audio-System ...... 108 Parking up the vehicle ...... 166 Listening to the radio ...... 110 Using a mobile phone ...... 112 Operating external data storage Dealing with accidents and break- media ...... 114 downs ...... 167 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown ...... 167 Using the smart Media-System ...... 116 Removing the first-aid kit ...... 170 Operating and setting up the smart Removing the fire extinguisher ...... 170 Media-System ...... 116 Removing the vehicle tool tray ...... 171 Listening to the radio ...... 121 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit .. 171 Displaying energy consumption ...... 122 Towing the vehicle ...... 174 Using a mobile phone ...... 123 Manually releasing the selector Connecting and operating external lever lock ...... 175 data storage media ...... 127 Replacing the bulbs ...... 176 Viewing images ...... 129 Changing fuses ...... 179 Video playback ...... 130 Replacing the key battery ...... 180 Using TomTom Services ...... 130 Opening a door with the emergency Using the navigation system ...... 132 release ...... 180 Locking the doors in an emergency .. 181 Using online offerings ...... 142 Online access to the vehicle ...... 142 Practical advice ...... 182 Using smart "ready to" services ...... 142 Notes on display messages ...... 182 Locking and unlocking ...... 182 Loading and stowing ...... 144 Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag ...... 183 Stowing small objects ...... 144 Engine, brakes, transmission ...... 185 Stowing luggage and large objects ... 145 Charging process ...... 187 Using the boot separator ...... 147 Driving safety systems ...... 190 Removing/fitting the charging Driver assistance systems ...... 195 cable bag ...... 148 Battery, lights, heating ...... 198 smart Audio-System and smart Media-System ...... 200 Maintenance and care ...... 150 Useful information ...... 150 Removing/fitting the subwoofer ...... 150 Technical data ...... 202 Opening and closing the service Obtaining technical data ...... 202 cover ...... 150 Reading vehicle data ...... 202 Checking service products and top- Service products ...... 204 ping up ...... 152 Bulb types ...... 204 Checking wheels and tyres ...... 153 Fuse allocation ...... 205 Changing a wheel ...... 154 Radio type approvals for the tyre Using the tyre pressure monitor ...... 157 pressure monitors ...... 207 Checking the tyre pressures ...... 158 Installing two-way radios and Using winter tyres ...... 159 mobile phones ...... 208 Using snow chains ...... 160 4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Headbag ...... 39 Installation locations ...... 39 12 V battery Limited protection ...... 40 Important safety notes ...... 24 Overview ...... 39 12 V socket PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator see Socket (12 V) lamps ...... 40 Airbags A Front airbag (driver, front ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) passenger) ...... 39 Display message ...... 190 Kneebag ...... 39 Function/notes ...... 54 Protection provided ...... 39 Warning lamp (yellow) ...... 190 Sidebag ...... 39 Acceleration Triggering ...... 36 see Kickdown Windowbag ...... 39 Acoustic presence indicator Alarm Deactivating/activating ...... 65 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 101 Function/notes ...... 65 Switching off ...... 101 Active Brake Assist Alerts Activating or deactivating ...... 56 Setting (Audio-System) ...... 111 Display message ...... 195 Ambient lighting Forward collision warning Setting the brightness ...... 107 function ...... 55 Switching on/off ...... 106 Function/notes ...... 54 Android Auto™ Important safety notes ...... 55 Using ...... 126 Switching off/on (on-board Animals computer with colour display) ..... 106 see Pets in the vehicle Switching on/off (on-board Anti-entrapment feature computer with monochrome see Reversing feature display) ...... 105 Anti-lock Braking System Adjusting the headlamp range ...... 83 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Air conditioning Anti-skid chains General notes ...... 92 see Snow chains Air distribution Anti-theft alarm system Setting (automatic climate con- Priming/deactivating ...... 101 trol) ...... 93 Switching off the alarm ...... 101 Air pressure Aquaplaning ...... 70 see Tyre pressure Ashtray ...... 96 Air vents Audio-System Important safety notes ...... 94 Connecting a mobile phone ...... 112 Setting ...... 94 Connecting Bluetooth® audio Air vents devices ...... 115 see Air vents Connecting external audio Air-recirculation mode equipment (AUX) ...... 115 Switching on/off (automatic Operating ...... 108 climate control) ...... 93 Operating the radio ...... 110 Airbag Operating via the mobile phone .. 109 Enabling and disabling the Overview ...... 108 passenger airbag* ...... 50 Setting interruption for news ...... 111 Index 5

Setting the time ...... 110 Battery (vehicle) Smartphone bracket ...... 108 see High-voltage battery System settings ...... 109 Belt Troubleshooting ...... 200 see Seat belt Using external devices ...... 108 Belt tensioner Volume/sound settings ...... 110 Activation ...... 36 Warranty ...... 21 Belt warning ...... 38 Authorised workshop Blower speed see Qualified specialist workshop Increasing or decreasing (auto- Automatic climate control matic climate control) ...... 93 Activating/deactivating air- Bluetooth® recirculation mode ...... 93 Activating mobile phone Cooling with air dehumidifica- (Audio-System) ...... 112 tion ...... 93 Activating the mobile phone Demisting the rear window ...... 94 (Media-System) ...... 123 Demisting the windscreen ...... 93 Authorising function for mobile Increasing/decreasing the phone (Audio-System) ...... 112 blower speed ...... 93 Connecting a device (Media- Setting air distribution ...... 93 System) ...... 128 Setting the temperature ...... 93 Operating (Audio-System) ...... 115 Switching on/off ...... 93 Switching on/off (Media-Sys- Windows misted up ...... 94 tem) ...... 123 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 82 Bonnet (front) Automatic transmission see Service cover Display message ...... 187 Boot Engaging neutral ...... 64 see Tailgate Engaging reverse gear ...... 64 Boot separator Engaging the park position ...... 64 Fitting ...... 147 Important safety notes ...... 64 Removing ...... 148 Kickdown ...... 64 Brake Manually releasing the selector EBD ...... 56 lever lock ...... 175 Brake Assist Pulling away ...... 62 see Active Brake Assist Starting the engine ...... 62 Brake fluid Transmission positions ...... 64 Display message ...... 186 AUX jack Brake force distribution Audio-System ...... 108 see EBD (electronic brake force Media-System ...... 116 distribution) Brake lamp B Replacing bulbs ...... 177 Brake lamps Battery Display message ...... 198 Display message ...... 198 Brakes Battery ABS ...... 54 see High-voltage battery Driving tips ...... 69 Battery (key) Important safety notes ...... 69 Important safety notes ...... 180 Parking brake ...... 63 Replacing ...... 180 Warning lamp ...... 186 6 Index

Braking Central locking Braking on steep downhill gra- Automatic locking ...... 87 dients ...... 69 Locking/unlocking (key) ...... 101 Braking on wet road surfaces ...... 69 Centre console Limited braking performance Overview ...... 31 on salt-treated roads ...... 69 Changing the route Breakdown Navigation ...... 136 Towing away ...... 174 Charge cable see Flat tyre Display message ...... 187 Charge level display ...... 67 C Charging see Charging the high-voltage Car battery see Vehicle Charging cable Car key Connection ...... 81 see Key Control panel ...... 78 Car wash Disconnecting ...... 81 see Care Heating up ...... 75 Car wash (care) ...... 162 Storing ...... 81 Care Version 1 (mode 2) ...... 79 Automatic car wash ...... 162 Version 2 (mode 2) ...... 79 Carpets ...... 165 Charging cable bag Cleaning the interior ...... 164 Removing/fitting ...... 148 Cleaning the roof lining (smart Charging current fortwo coupé) ...... 165 Display messages ...... 187 Display ...... 164 Child seat Exterior ...... 161 Approval categories ...... 45 Exterior lighting ...... 164 Basic instructions ...... 41 High-pressure cleaner ...... 162 Disabling or enabling the front High-voltage battery ...... 75 passenger front airbag ...... 50 Interior ...... 164 Front passenger seat (notes) ...... 52 Matt paintwork ...... 161 ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) ...... 48 Notes ...... 161 Notes on risks and dangers ...... 42 Paint ...... 164 Recommendations for child Plastic trim ...... 165 restraint systems ...... 44 Reversing camera ...... 162 Seats suitable for belt-secured Roof lining ...... 164 child restraint systems ...... 52 Seat belt ...... 164 Seats suitable for ISOFIX child Seat cover ...... 165 restraint systems ...... 46 Selector lever ...... 164 Securing (notes) ...... 45 Sensors ...... 163 Securing on the front passenger Soft-top system ...... 164 seat ...... 53 Steering wheel ...... 164 Suitability of the seats for i- Trim pieces ...... 165 Size child restraint systems ...... 48 Washing by hand ...... 162 Top Tether ...... 50 Wheels ...... 163 Children Windows ...... 163 Avoiding dangers in the vehicle .... 42 Wiper blades ...... 163 Basic instructions ...... 41 Index 7

Cigarette lighter ...... 96 Increasing/decreasing the Cleaning speed ...... 72 see Care Storing and maintaining cur- Climate control rent speed ...... 72 Automatic air conditioning ...... 93 Cup holder Setting the air vents ...... 94 Centre console ...... 144 Clock Important safety notes ...... 144 Setting the time (Media-Sys- Cup holder tem) ...... 119 see Cup holder Cockpit Overview ...... 29 D Collision warning DAB radio Warning lamp ...... 195 see Digital radio COMAND display Dashboard Cleaning ...... 164 see Cockpit Connectivity manager ...... 131 Data Constant headlamp mode see Technical data see Daytime driving lights Data sharing Consumption details Managing ...... 132 Calling up (Media-System) ...... 123 Data storage media Controlling speed see External data storage media see Cruise control Daytime driving lights ...... 82 Coolant Dealership Checking coolant level and top- see Qualified specialist workshop ping up ...... 152 Declarations of conformity ...... 22 Important safety notes ...... 152 Diagnostics connection ...... 24 Cooling Digital radio see Climate control Audio-System ...... 111 Cooling with air dehumidification Displaying services (Media- Automatic climate control ...... 93 System) ...... 122 Copyright ...... 28 EPG (Electronic Programme Cornering light function ...... 83 Guide) (Media-System) ...... 122 Cover (front) Frequency range (Audio-Sys- see Service cover tem) ...... 110 Crosswind Assist ...... 56 Intellitext™ (Media-System) ...... 122 Cruise control Introducing (Audio-System) ...... 111 Activating ...... 72 Media-System ...... 121 Buttons ...... 72 Setting interruption for news Calling up the speed last stored .... 72 (Audio-System) ...... 111 Cancelling cruise control ...... 72 Slide show (Media-System) ...... 122 Deactivating ...... 72 Digital speedometer Display message (colour dis- Displaying ...... 106 play) ...... 197 Dipped-beam headlamps Display message (monochrome Driving abroad ...... 84 display) ...... 197 Replacing bulbs ...... 176 Function/notes ...... 71 Switching on/off ...... 82 General notes ...... 71 Important safety notes ...... 71 8 Index

Display Speed limiter ...... 71 Colour ...... 102 Driving tips Monochrome ...... 102 Aquaplaning ...... 70 Display message Brakes ...... 69 Colour display ...... 105 Downhill gradient ...... 69 Display messages Driving in winter ...... 70 General information ...... 182 Driving on flooded roads ...... 70 Disposal of old devices ...... 76 Driving on wet roads ...... 70 Distance recorder Icy road surfaces ...... 70 Monochrome display ...... 103 Limited braking efficiency on Distance recorder salted roads ...... 69 see Trip meter Pulling away ...... 62 Door Symmetrical dipped beam ...... 84 Automatic locking (switch) ...... 87 see Economical driving Central locking/unlocking (key) .. 101 Dynamic handling control system Control panel ...... 33 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Display message ...... 183 Program) Emergency locking ...... 181 Emergency unlocking ...... 180 E Opening (from the inside) ...... 87 Unlocking (key) ...... 57 EBD (electronic brake force distri- Double lock function ...... 87 bution) Draught stop Function/notes ...... 56 Inserting and removing ...... 92 Indicator lamp ...... 190 Driver's door ECO mode see Door Switching on/off ...... 66 Driver's seat eco score see Seat Calling up ...... 68 Driving abroad Comparing the trip ...... 68 Symmetrical dipped beam ...... 84 Display (colour display) ...... 68 Driving noise Display (monochrome display) ...... 68 see Acoustic presence indicator Evaluating the current trip ...... 68 Driving safety system Function/notes ...... 67 Active Brake Assist ...... 54 Resetting data ...... 69 Crosswind Assist ...... 56 Saving the trip ...... 68 Driving safety system limita- Economical driving tions ...... 54 eco score display ...... 67 EBD (electronic brake force dis- General information ...... 66 tribution) ...... 56 Electrical fuses Driving safety systems see Fuses ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .... 54 Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ...... 22 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Electronic Brake-force Distribution gram) ...... 56 see EBD (electronic brake force ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- distribution) tem) ...... 56 Electronic Stability Program Driving systems ® Cruise control ...... 71 see ESP (Electronic Stability Lane Keeping Assist ...... 70 Program) Index 9

Electronic Traction System Exterior mirrors see ETS (Electronic Traction System) Adjusting ...... 61 Emergency assistance system Out of position (troubleshoot- Automatic emergency call ...... 168 ing) ...... 183 Button in the overhead control External audio equipment (AUX) panel ...... 167 Connecting (Audio-System) ...... 115 Manual emergency call ...... 168 External data carriers Overview ...... 167 Connection (Media-System) ...... 128 Requirements ...... 167 Operation (Media-System) ...... 128 Transmitted data ...... 167 External data storage media Emergency release Connecting (Audio-System) ...... 108 Driver's door ...... 180 Operating (Audio-System) ...... 114 Emergency unlocking Vehicle ...... 180 F Energy Factory settings Displaying the current con- Resetting (Media-System) ...... 119 sumption (colour display) ...... 104 Favourites Energy consumption Creating (Media-System) ...... 120 High-voltage battery ...... 75 Managing (Media-System) ...... 120 Energy flow display Fire extinguisher ...... 170 Calling up (Media-System) ...... 122 First-aid kit ...... 170 Colour display ...... 104 Fitting a wheel Engine Fitting a wheel ...... 156 Starting problems ...... 185 Preparing the vehicle ...... 155 Starting the engine with the key .. 62 Raising the vehicle ...... 155 Engine electronics Removing a wheel ...... 155 Notes ...... 21 Securing the vehicle against Entering a destination rolling away ...... 169 Navigation ...... 133 Fitting/removing Environmental protection front wheel arch cover ...... 177 High-voltage battery ...... 20 Flat tyre Returning an end-of-life vehi- Preparing the vehicle ...... 167 cle ...... 20 TIREFIT kit ...... 171 EPG (Electronic Program Guide) Floormat ...... 96 Displaying (Audio-System) ...... 112 Foglamps EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Switching on/off ...... 83 Displaying (Media-System) ...... 122 Fording ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) On flooded roads ...... 70 Crosswind Assist ...... 56 Forward collision warning function Display message ...... 191 Function/notes ...... 55 General notes ...... 56 Frequencies Important safety guidelines ...... 56 Mobile phone ...... 208 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 191 Two-way radio ...... 208 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...... 56 Front airbag ...... 39 Exterior lighting Front cover Cleaning ...... 164 see Service cover see Lights 10 Index

Front wheel arch Method of operation ...... 74 Fitting/removing the cover ...... 177 Outside temperatures ...... 75 Front-passenger front airbag deac- Problems during charging ...... 187 tivation system Protective equipment ...... 75 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator Range ...... 75 lamps ...... 40 READY indicator ...... 198 Status indicator ...... 40 Terms of use ...... 75 Front-passenger seat Vehicle socket ...... 76 see Seat Warning and indicator lamps ...... 198 Frontal area cover High-voltage electrical system see Service cover Automatic switch-off ...... 25 Fuses Danger of electric shock ...... 25 Allocation chart ...... 205 Operating safety ...... 25 Before changing ...... 179 Vehicle fire ...... 25 Dashboard fuse box ...... 179 Home address Important safety notes ...... 179 Entering and saving ...... 134 Opening the fuse box ...... 179 Home address (navigation) see Home address G I Glove compartment ...... 145 i-Size child seat securing system H Fitting ...... 48 Suitable seats for securing ...... 48 Hand brake i-Traffic see Parking brake Traffic announcements ...... 122 Hands-free system Ice warning see Mobile phone Warning lamp (colour display) .... 197 Hazard warning lamps Warning lamp (monochrome Switching on/off ...... 167 display) ...... 197 Headbag ...... 39 Ignition lock Headlamp flasher ...... 83 see Key positions Headlamps Image see Automatic headlamp mode Playback (Media-System) ...... 129 Heating Immobiliser ...... 101 see Climate control Indicator and warning lamp High-voltage battery Restraint system ...... 184 Battery care ...... 75 Indicator and warning lamps Charge level ...... 67 Battery ...... 198 Charge level display ...... 67 Indicator lamps Charging (charging station) ...... 77 see Warning and indicator lamps Charging (mains socket) ...... 81 Instrument cluster Charging (wallbox) ...... 77 Overview ...... 34 Charging cable heating up ...... 75 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 34 Discharged battery ...... 74 Instrument cluster lighting Display message ...... 198 Setting ...... 106 Energy consumption ...... 75 Instrument lighting Important safety notes ...... 72 see Instrument cluster lighting Indicator lamp (vehicle socket) ..... 76 Index 11

Intellitext™ Language (on-board computer) ...... 107 Setting (Media-System) ...... 122 Licence plate lighting Switching on (Audio-System) ...... 112 Changing bulbs ...... 178 Interior lighting ...... 84 Light Adjusting the ambient lighting see Replacing bulbs (colour display) ...... 84 Lighting Changing bulbs ...... 178 see Lights Setting the ambient lighting ...... 106 Lights Switching on/off ...... 84 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 82 Intermittent wipe ...... 85 Cornering light function ...... 83 ISOFIX child seat securing system Dipped-beam headlamps ...... 82 Fitting ...... 48 Display message ...... 199 Suitable seats for securing ...... 46 Driving abroad ...... 84 Foglamps ...... 83 J Hazard warning lamps ...... 167 Headlamp flasher ...... 83 Jack Headlamp range ...... 83 Using ...... 155 Light switch ...... 82 Main-beam headlamps ...... 82 K Rear foglamp ...... 83 Key Setting the ambient lighting ...... 106 Changing the battery ...... 180 Side lamps ...... 83 Loss ...... 182 Turn signals ...... 65 Opening the soft top ...... 90 see Interior lighting Position in the ignition lock ...... 62 Limiter Problem (malfunction) ...... 182 Calling up the stored limit Starting the engine ...... 62 speed ...... 72 Key positions (ignition lock) ...... 62 Cancelling ...... 72 Keyboard Deactivating ...... 72 Adjusting (Media-System) ...... 118 Display message (colour dis- Kickdown ...... 64 play) ...... 197 Kneebag ...... 39 Exceeding the stored limit speed ...... 71 L General notes ...... 71 Increasing or reducing the Lamps stored limit speed ...... 72 see Warning and indicator lamps Limiting the speed Lane Keeping Assist see Speed limiter Activating/deactivating ...... 71 Loading guidelines ...... 145 Function/information ...... 70 Locking Warning lamp (colour display) .... 197 see Central locking Warning lamp (monochrome Locking (doors) display) ...... 197 Automatic ...... 87 Lane recognition system (auto- Emergency locking ...... 181 matic) From inside (central locking see Lane Keeping Assist button) ...... 87 Language Loudspeaker Selecting (Media-System) ...... 118 see Subwoofer 12 Index

M Video playback ...... 130 Volume/tone settings ...... 119 M+S tyres (winter tyres) ...... 159 Warranty ...... 21 Main-beam headlamps Message memory (colour display) ...... 105 Replacing bulbs ...... 176 MirrorLink™ Switching on/off ...... 82 Using ...... 125 Making a call Mirrors Media-System ...... 124 see Exterior mirrors Malfunction message see Rear-view mirror see Display message Mobile phone Manually releasing the selector Connecting (Audio-System) ...... 112 lever lock (automatic transmission) ... 175 Connecting (Media-System) ...... 123 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .... 161 Downloading data automati- Media-System cally (Media-System) ...... 124 Adjusting the on-screen key- Frequencies ...... 208 board ...... 118 Installation ...... 208 Buttons on the multifunction Loading and updating the tele- steering wheel ...... 116 phone book (Audio-System) ...... 112 Calling up Applications man- Making a call (Media-System) ..... 124 ager ...... 131 Setting the sound (Audio-Sys- Calling up menus ...... 118 tem) ...... 113 Connectivity manager ...... 131 Transmission output (maxi- Consumption details ...... 123 mum) ...... 208 Controls ...... 116 Using Android Auto™ ...... 126 Creating favourites ...... 120 Using MirrorLink™ ...... 125 Data connectivity ...... 130 Using voice control (Audio- Display settings ...... 118 System) ...... 114 Downloading updates and POIs ... 131 Using voice control (Media- eco score ...... 68 System) ...... 127 Enabling data sharing ...... 132 Model series Energy flow display ...... 122 see Vehicle identification plate Home screen ...... 117 Multi-functional seat Image playback ...... 129 see Seat Navigation menu ...... 132 Multifunction steering wheel Navigation system ...... 132 Overview ...... 30 Operating the radio ...... 121 Overview ...... 116 N Problem solving ...... 200 Reversing camera ...... 99 Navigation Selecting the home screen dis- Alternative route ...... 136 play ...... 119 Changing the route ...... 136 Selecting the language ...... 118 Current location ...... 139 Setting the time ...... 119 Destination memory ...... 134 Setting warning tones ...... 120 Displaying the reachability Status and information ...... 119 map ...... 139 Switching on/off ...... 117 Entering a charging station as a System menu ...... 118 destination ...... 134 System settings ...... 118 Entering a destination ...... 133 Index 13

Entering a destination by Setting and resetting values address ...... 133 (monochrome display) ...... 105 Entering a destination using On-board diagnostics interface geo-coordinates ...... 133 see Diagnostics connection Entering a destination using On-screen keyboard the map ...... 133 Adjusting (Media-System) ...... 118 Entering a POI ...... 134 Online access ...... 142 Entering/saving your home Operating instructions address ...... 134 Vehicle equipment ...... 21 Reading map data ...... 132 Operating safety Route details ...... 136 Declaration of conformity ...... 22 Selecting a destination from the High-voltage electrical system ..... 25 list of last destinations ...... 133 Operating system Setting route planning ...... 137 see On-board computer Setting the voice ...... 140 Original parts ...... 20 Starting ...... 132 Outside temperature display Starting route calculation ...... 135 Colour display ...... 102 Switching announcements Monochrome display ...... 102 on/off ...... 137 Setting the units ...... 106 System settings ...... 140 Outside temperatures TomTom Services ...... 130 High-voltage battery ...... 75 Traffic information ...... 138 Overhead control panel ...... 32 Troubleshooting ...... 200 Overvoltage protection Way points ...... 136 High-voltage battery ...... 75

O P Occupant safety Paint code ...... 202 Airbags ...... 39 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ...... 164 Belt warning ...... 38 Park brake Children in the vehicle ...... 41 see Parking brake PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator Parking ...... 98 lamp ...... 40 Engaging park position ...... 64 Pets in the vehicle ...... 54 Important safety notes ...... 98 Restraint system ...... 35 Parking aid ...... 98 Restraint system warning lamp .... 35 Parking brake ...... 63 Seat belts ...... 37 Reversing camera ...... 99 On-board computer Parking brake Calling up displays (colour dis- Display message ...... 186 play) ...... 103 General information ...... 63 Calling up displays (mono- Warning lamp ...... 186 chrome display) ...... 103 PASSENGER AIR BAG Important safety notes ...... 102 Disabling/activating ...... 50 Operation ...... 102 Indicator lamps ...... 40 Overview ...... 102 Passenger airbag Selecting the language ...... 107 Enabling and disabling* ...... 50 Setting and resetting values Problem (malfunction)* ...... 184 (colour display) ...... 105 14 Index

Passenger seat Radio-based vehicle components Folding down ...... 147 Declaration of conformity ...... 22 Pets in the vehicle ...... 54 Rain sensor ...... 85 Power display ...... 67 Rain/light sensor (display message) .. 198 Power windows Range see Side windows High-voltage battery ...... 75 Pre-entry climate control and RBS charging see Radar-based recuperation Colour display ...... 105 Reading lamp ...... 84 Pre-entry climate control at depar- Rear foglamp ture time Replacing bulbs ...... 177 Smart-Charging ...... 94 Switching on/off ...... 83 Pre-entry climate control at time of Rear lamp departure Replacing bulbs ...... 177 Setting departure time ...... 94 Rear parking aid Protection against theft Activating/deactivating ...... 98 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 101 Function/notes ...... 98 Protection of the environment Rear soft top General notes ...... 20 Closing ...... 146 Pulling away Opening ...... 146 General notes ...... 62 Rear window heating Hill start assist ...... 64 Demisting the rear window (automatic climate control) ...... 94 Q Rear window wiper Automatic rear window wiper QR code when in reverse gear ...... 85 Rescue card ...... 26 Replacing the wiper blade ...... 161 Qualified specialist workshop ...... 24 Switching on/off ...... 85 Rear-view mirror ...... 60 R Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ...... 60 Radar-based recuperation Dipping (manual) ...... 60 Function/notes ...... 65 Recharging cable Switching off/on (on-board Indicator lamp ...... 78 computer with colour display) ..... 106 Recuperation (radar based) Radio Function/notes ...... 65 Display mode ...... 121 Recuperation (radar-based) Displaying programme infor- Switching on and off (colour mation (EPG) (Audio-System) ...... 112 display) ...... 106 i-Traffic (Traffic announce- Recycling ments) ...... 122 see Protection of the environment Operating (Audio-System) ...... 110 Reflective safety jacket ...... 170 Operation (Media-System) ...... 121 Remote configuration Radio text smart control ...... 142 Displaying (Audio-System) ...... 111 Remote query functions Displaying (Media-System) ...... 122 smart control ...... 142 Radio type approvals Replacing bulbs Tyre pressure monitors ...... 207 Brake lamp ...... 177 Dipped-beam headlamps ...... 176 Index 15

Fitting/removing the cover S (front wheel arch) ...... 177 Important safety notes ...... 176 Safety LED ...... 177 Children in the vehicle ...... 41 Licence plate lighting ...... 178 see Occupant safety Main-beam headlamps ...... 176 see Operating safety Overview of bulb types ...... 204 Safety system Rear foglamp ...... 177 see Driving safety system Rear lamp ...... 177 SD card Reversing lamp ...... 177 Connecting (Media-System) ...... 128 Turn signal lamp (rear) ...... 177 Reading map data ...... 132 see Changing bulbs SD card slot ...... 116 Replacing lamps Seat see Changing bulbs Correct driver's seat position ...... 57 Replacing the bulb Folding passenger seat down ...... 147 Turn signal lamp (front) ...... 177 Seat belt Replacing the bulbs Limited protection ...... 37 Interior lighting ...... 178 Protection provided ...... 37 Rescue card ...... 26 Seat belts Restraint system Cleaning ...... 164 Basic instructions ...... 41 Fastening ...... 38 Display message ...... 184 Releasing ...... 38 Function during an accident ...... 36 Warning lamp ...... 184 Limited protection ...... 35 Warning lamp (function) ...... 38 Malfunction ...... 35 Seat heating ...... 95 Operational readiness ...... 35 Seats Protection provided ...... 35 Adjusting (manually) ...... 58 System self-test ...... 35 Cleaning the cover ...... 165 Warning lamp ...... 184 Important safety notes ...... 58 Warning lamp (function) ...... 35 Switching seat heating on/off ...... 95 Reverse gear Selector lever Engaging (automatic transmis- Cleaning ...... 164 sion) ...... 64 Selector lever Reversing camera see Automatic transmission Cleaning instructions ...... 162 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ...... 163 Function/notes ...... 99 Service Centre Guide lines in the display ...... 100 see Qualified specialist workshop Settings ...... 100 Service cover ...... 150 Switching on/off ...... 100 Service display Reversing feature Calling up (colour display) ...... 105 Side windows ...... 88 Calling up (monochrome dis- Reversing lamp play) ...... 103 Replacing bulbs ...... 177 Service due date Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Display message ...... 187 instructions) ...... 165 Service products Brake fluid ...... 204 Coolant (engine) ...... 152 Important safety notes ...... 152 16 Index

Washer fluid ...... 204 Opening ...... 90 Services menu settings Opening the rear soft top ...... 146 TomTom Services ...... 130 Removing the side bars ...... 90 Setting the charge current Stowing the side bars ...... 90 Charging cable version 2 ...... 80 Sound Side bars Setting (Audio-System) ...... 110 Closing the stowage space ...... 92 Setting (Media-System) ...... 119 Stowing ...... 90 Sound generator Side lamps see Acoustic presence indicator Switching on/off ...... 83 Speakers Side spars see Subwoofer Fitting ...... 91 Special destination Removing ...... 90 Entry ...... 134 Side windows Specialist workshop ...... 24 Important safety notes ...... 88 Speed limiter Opening/closing ...... 89 Activating ...... 72 Problem (malfunction) ...... 183 Functions and conditions for Resetting ...... 183 activation ...... 71 Reversing feature ...... 88 Setting limit speed ...... 72 Sidebag ...... 39 Speedometer smart Centre Digital ...... 102 see Qualified specialist workshop Displaying (digital speedome- smart control ter) ...... 106 Internet ...... 142 General notes (digital speed- smart Services ometer) ...... 105 Registering ...... 142 see Instrument cluster Using ...... 142 Starting (engine) ...... 62 Smart-Charging Starting the engine Function/notes ...... 94 see Starting (engine) Smartphone Station Fitting the bracket ...... 109 Selecting a stored station Inserting/removing ...... 109 (Audio-System) ...... 111 Operating the Audio-System Setting (Media-System) ...... 121 via the mobile phone ...... 109 Station list Smartphone Screen Setting a station from the sta- Setting (Media -System) ...... 125 tion list (Audio-System) ...... 111 Snow chains ...... 160 Updating (Media-System) ...... 122 Socket (12 V) Station search Centre console ...... 96 Audio-System ...... 111 Socket (high-voltage battery) Stations see Vehicle socket Setting (Audio-System) ...... 110 Soft top Storing (Audio-System) ...... 111 Cleaning ...... 164 Steering Closing ...... 90 Display message (colour dis- Closing the rear soft top ...... 146 play) ...... 195 Closing the stowage space Warning lamps ...... 195 without the side bars ...... 92 Steering wheel Important safety notes ...... 89 Adjusting (manually) ...... 59 Index 17

Button overview ...... 30 Starting ...... 131 Cleaning ...... 164 Subscription status ...... 131 Important safety notes ...... 59 Traffic information menu ...... 139 Steering wheel heating Tool Switching on/off ...... 95 see Vehicle tool kit Stowage areas ...... 144 Top Tether ...... 50 Stowage compartment in the tail- Total distance recorder gate ...... 145 Colour display ...... 104 Stowage compartments Monochrome display ...... 102 Centre console ...... 144 Setting the display unit ...... 106 Cup holder ...... 144 Touchscreen Door ...... 144 Confirming settings with Done .... 118 Glove compartment ...... 144 Operating the touchscreen ...... 117 Important safety information ...... 144 Towing Spectacles compartment ...... 144 Important safety notes ...... 174 Subwoofer Towing away Fitting/removing ...... 150 Fitting the towing eye ...... 175 Sun visor ...... 86 Removing the towing eye ...... 175 With both axles on the ground ..... 175 T Traction system see ETS (Electronic Traction System) Tailgate Traffic reports Opening dimensions ...... 202 Switching on/off ...... 111 Opening/closing ...... 146 Transmission Warning lamp ...... 183 see Automatic transmission Tailgate (smart fortwo cabrio) Transporting the vehicle ...... 175 Opening/closing ...... 146 Trip computer Technical data Displaying ...... 104 Information ...... 202 Trip meter Vehicle data ...... 202 Colour display ...... 104 Telephone book Displaying (colour display) ...... 104 Loading (Audio-System) ...... 112 Displaying (monochrome dis- Telephone operation play) ...... 103 Audio-System ...... 113 Trip meter Temperature see Trip meter Setting (automatic climate con- Turn signal lamp (front) trol) ...... 93 Replacing the bulb ...... 177 Time Turn signal lamp (rear) Setting (Audio-System) ...... 110 Replacing bulbs ...... 177 Setting (colour display) ...... 106 Turn signals Setting (monochrome display) ..... 105 Replacing the bulb ...... 177 Setting the time format (colour Switching on/off ...... 65 display) ...... 106 Turn signals TIREFIT kit ...... 171 see Turn signals TomTom Services Two-way radio Activating ...... 131 Frequencies ...... 208 Introduction ...... 130 Installation ...... 208 My Services menu ...... 131 18 Index

Transmission output (maxi- V mum) ...... 208 Type identification plate Values see Vehicle identification plate Setting (colour display) ...... 105 Tyre pressure Setting (monochrome display) ..... 105 Checking/correcting ...... 159 Vehicle Display message ...... 192 Correct use ...... 26 Important safety notes ...... 158 Data acquisition ...... 26 Not reached (TIREFIT) ...... 173 Electronics ...... 21 Reached (TIREFIT) ...... 173 Equipment ...... 21 Recommended ...... 158 Implied warranty ...... 26 Tyre pressure monitor Locking (in an emergency) ...... 181 Function/notes ...... 157 Locking (key) ...... 101 Radio type approval for the tyre Operating safety ...... 21 pressure monitor ...... 207 Parking ...... 98 Restarting ...... 157 Parking up ...... 166 Starting ...... 106 Raising ...... 155 Warning lamp ...... 192 Registration ...... 25 Tyres Remote configuration ...... 142 Changing a wheel ...... 154 Remote query functions ...... 142 Checking ...... 153 Securing from rolling away ...... 169 Direction of rotation ...... 156 Towing away ...... 174 Important safety notes ...... 153 Transporting ...... 175 M+S tyres (winter tyres) ...... 159 Unlocking (in an emergency) ...... 180 Rules for new tyres ...... 154 Unlocking (key) ...... 57 Service life ...... 154 Vehicle data ...... 202 Snow chains ...... 160 Vehicle data ...... 202 Storing ...... 157 Vehicle dimensions ...... 202 Tyre tread ...... 153 Vehicle emergency locking ...... 181 see Flat tyre Vehicle identification number see VIN U Vehicle identification plate ...... 202 Vehicle key Unit of measurement for distance see Key Setting ...... 106 Vehicle socket Units High-voltage battery ...... 76 Setting (on-board computer) ...... 106 Indicator lamp ...... 76 Unlocking Problems during the charging From inside the vehicle (central process ...... 187 unlocking button) ...... 87 Vehicle tool kit ...... 171 With emergency key element ...... 180 Ventilation USB device see Air conditioning Connecting (Audio-System) ...... 114 Video Connection (Media-System) ...... 128 Playback (Media-System) ...... 130 Operating (Audio-System) ...... 114 VIN ...... 202 USB port Voice control system Audio-System ...... 108 Entering a destination in the Media-System ...... 116 navigation system ...... 133 Index 19

Problems with the voice control Windscreen washer fluid system ...... 201 see Windscreen washer system Starting an application ...... 116 Windscreen washer system Voltage range Important safety notes ...... 153 High-voltage battery ...... 74 Topping up ...... 153 Volume Windscreen wipers Adjusting automatically ...... 110 Intermittent wipe ...... 85 Setting (Audio-System) ...... 110 Problem (malfunction) ...... 183 Setting (Media-System) ...... 119 Rain sensor ...... 85 Rear window wiper ...... 85 W Replacing the wiper blades ...... 160 Switching on/off ...... 84 Warning and indicator lamps Wiping with washer fluid ...... 85 ABS ...... 190 Wing Active Brake Assist ...... 195 see Front wheel arch Brakes ...... 186 Winter driving Collision warning (red) ...... 195 General notes ...... 70 EBD ...... 190 ® Winter operation ESP (yellow) ...... 191 Slippery road surfaces ...... 70 High-voltage battery ...... 198 Snow chains ...... 160 Lane Keeping Assist ...... 196 Winter tyres Overview ...... 34 M+S tyres ...... 159 Parking brake ...... 186 Wiper blades PASSENGER AIR BAG ...... 40 Cleaning ...... 163 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ...... 184 Replacing (on the rear window) ... 161 Seat belt ...... 184 Replacing (windscreen) ...... 160 Steering ...... 195 Workshop Tyre pressure monitor ...... 192 see Qualified specialist workshop Warning triangle ...... 169 Wheel bolt tightening torque ...... 156 Wheels Changing a wheel ...... 154 Checking ...... 153 Cleaning ...... 163 Fitting a new wheel ...... 156 Important safety notes ...... 153 Removing a wheel ...... 155 Snow chains ...... 160 Storing ...... 157 Tightening torque ...... 156 Windowbag ...... 39 Windows Cleaning ...... 163 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting (automatic climate control) ...... 93 20 >> Introduction.

Protecting the environment High-voltage battery

General notes H Environmental note Have a defective high-voltage battery dis- Environmental note H posed of in an environmentally-responsi- Daimler's declared policy is one of com- ble manner. Contact a specialist workshop, prehensive environmental protection. which is qualified for smart EQ fortwo, Our objectives are to use the natural smart EQ fortwo cabrio or smart EQ forfour, resources which form the basis of our exis- and has the necessary special skills and tence on this planet sparingly and in a tools to carry out the work required. smart manner which takes the requirements of recommends a smart centre for this. both nature and humanity into consider- ation. You too can help to protect the environ- Returning an end-of-life vehicle ment by operating your vehicle in an envi- EU countries only: ronmentally-responsible manner. smart will take back your end-of-life vehicle Energy consumption and the rate of for environment-friendly disposal in engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear accordance with the European Union (EU) depend on the following factors: End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive. Roperating conditions of your vehicle This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving Ryour personal driving style resources. A network of vehicle take-back You can influence both factors. Therefore, points and dismantlers has been established please bear the following in mind: for you to return your vehicle. Returning vehicles to these facilities is free of charge. Operating conditions: For further information about the recycling Robserve the correct tyre pressure. and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight in take-back conditions, please visit the national smart website for your country. the vehicle Rremove the roof rack once you no longer need it. smart genuine parts Ra regularly serviced vehicle will con- tribute to environmental protection. You Environmental note should therefore adhere to the service H Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned intervals. assemblies and parts which are of the same Rall maintenance work should be carried quality as new parts. For these, the same out at a qualified specialist workshop. warranty applies as for new parts. Personal driving style: Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe dis- ! as control units and sensors for these tance from the vehicle in front. restraint systems, may be installed in the Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and following areas of your vehicle: braking. Rdoors Rmonitor the vehicle's energy consump- Rdoor pillars tion. Rdoor sills Rseats Rdashboard >> Introduction. 21

Rinstrument cluster Warranty for the smart Audio-System Rcentre console and smart Media-System Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out The smart sales organisation provides a war- repairs or welding. You could impair the ranty for a period of 24 months without a kil- operating efficiency of the restraint sys- ometre limit for the smart Audio-System and tems. the smart Media-System. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified The warranty issuer is the respective sales specialist workshop. organisation in the country in which the Only smart genuine parts or parts of the same accessory or replacement part was pur- quality may be used. Additionally, only chased (see list in the service booklet). tyres, wheels and accessories approved for the specific type of vehicle may be used. Always specify the vehicle identification Vehicle equipment number (VIN) when ordering smart genuine parts. This Owner's Manual describes all models Using parts, tyres, wheels or safety-relevant and all standard and optional equipment equipment not approved by smart could available for the vehicle at the time of pub- endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. lication of this Owner's Manual. Country- Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake sys- specific differences are possible. Please note tem, could malfunction. that the vehicle equipment may differ from smart tests genuine parts and conversion certain descriptions and illustrations provi- parts and accessories that have been specif- ded in this manual. This is also the case for ically approved for your vehicle for their systems and functions relevant to safety. reliability, safety and suitability. Despite The vehicle's original purchase contract ongoing market research, smart is unable to documentation contains a list of all the sys- assess other parts. smart therefore accepts tems in your vehicle. Please contact any no responsibility for the use of such parts in smart centre to help clarify any questions smart vehicles, even if they have been offi- related to the vehicle equipment and opera- cially approved or independently approved tion. by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if Operating safety they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All gen- Important safety notes uine smart parts meet the approval require- ments. The use of non-approved parts may G WARNING invalidate the vehicle's general operating If you do not have the prescribed service/ permit. maintenance work or necessary repairs The following situations will invalidate the carried out, this could result in malfunc- operating permit: tions or system failures. There is a risk of RThe vehicle type changes from that stated an accident. in the vehicle's operating permit, due to modifications. Always have the prescribed service/main- ROther road users are likely to be endan- tenance work as well as necessary repairs gered. carried out at a qualified specialist work- REmissions or noise characteristics deteri- shop. orate. G WARNING If you operate information and communi- cation equipment integrated in the vehicle

Z 22 >> Introduction.

when driving, you could be distracted from ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: the traffic situation. This could also cause Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a kerb or an unpaved road risk of an accident. Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a Only operate this equipment when the kerb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road traffic situation permits. If you cannot be Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- parts of the chassis tion to road and traffic conditions and In situations like this, the body, the under- operate the equipment with the vehicle body, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could stationary. be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way G WARNING can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an Modifications to electronic components, accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. their software as well as wiring could In such situations, have the vehicle affect their function and/or the operation checked and repaired immediately at a of other networked components. This could qualified specialist workshop. If on con- in particular also be the case for systems tinuing your journey you notice that driv- relevant to safety. They might not function ing safety is impaired, pull over and stop properly anymore and/or jeopardise the the vehicle immediately, paying attention operational safety of the vehicle. There is to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist work- an increased risk of an accident and injury. shop. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well The multimedia device is equipped with as electronic components or their software. technical provisions to protect it against Always have work on electrical and elec- theft. Further information is available from tronic components carried out at a quali- any smart centre. fied specialist workshop. The functionality of a roof aerial (radio, DAB) may be impaired if roof carriers are used. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you Metallised retrofit film on windows may also are inattentive, the driving safety systems affect radio and GPS reception and have a can neither reduce the risk of accident nor negative impact on all other aerial functions override the laws of physics. Driving safety in the vehicle interior. systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and Declarations of conformity for staying in lane. The driving style should Electromagnetic compatibility always be adjusted to the current street and weather conditions. An adequate safe dis- The electromagnetic compatibility of the tance must be maintained at all times. vehicle components has been checked and You must observe the legal requirements for certified according to the currently valid the country in which you are currently driv- version of UNECE standard UN-R10. ing when operating information systems and communication devices integrated into the Declaration of conformity for two-way vehicle. radio systems according to Directive If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- 2014/53/EU tronics, the general operating permit is ren- dered invalid. The components of the vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other >> Introduction. 23 relevant regulations stipulated by Directive Factory: The same as manufacturer 2014/53/EU. Address of The same as manufacturer You can obtain further information from any Factory: Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Product Air compressor In the following, you will find the addresses Description: of radio component manufacturers which, Model No: AEROB-DP due to their size or nature, do not allow this information to be indicated on the equip- Sufficient samples of the product have been ment. tested and found to be in conformity with Tyre pressure monitor sensors: Schrader Test Standards: EN 50498:2010 Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, Belfast As shown in the Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland Test Report GZEM161000740001 Transponder ring: Number(s): Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, This verification of EMC Compliance has been Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, granted to the applicant based on the results Tunisia of the tests, performed by laboratory of SGS- Remote keyless entry: CSTC Standards Technical Services Co., Ltd. Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, on the sample of the above-mentioned prod- Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, uct in accordance with the provisions of the Tunisia relevant specific standards under Directive Alps Electric Europe GmbH, Ohmstraße 4, 2014/30/EU. The CE mark as shown below can D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Germany be used, under the responsibility of the man- ufacturer, after completion of an EU Decla- Radio: ration of Conformity and compliance with all Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, relevant EU Directives. Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, Date: 2016-11-10 Tunisia Signature: Kobe Jian Continental Automotive, 1 Rue de Clairefon- taine, 78120 Rambouillet, France Mobile communication and telemetry: Type of radio device in the vehicle Ficosa Internationnal, Gran Via de Carles III 98, 08028 Barcelona, Spain Frequency Technology Transmis- range sion output/ Radar: magnetic Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6, 71229 field Leonberg, Germany strength Windscreen unit: 125 kHz Trans- ≤ 42 dBμA/m car2go Group GmbH, Fasanenweg 15-17, ponder ring at 10 m 70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen, Germany (119 kHz - 135 kHz) TIREFIT kit 13.553 MHz - Windscreen ≤ 42 dBμA/m 13.567 MHz unit (vehicle at 10 m Copy of the original declaration of conform- access sys- ity: tem for VERIFICATION OF EMC COMPLIANCE Car2Go) Verification GZEM161000740001V No.: 433 MHz Remote key- ≤ 10 mW less entry e.r.p. Applicant: ITW Global Tire Repair Europe (433.05 MHz GmbH - Tyre pres- 434.79 MHz) sure monitor Address of No. 11 Kuiqing Road, Qingxi Manufac- Town, Dongguan City, China. turer:

Z 24 >> Introduction.

Frequency Technology Transmis- Qualified specialist workshop range sion output/ A qualified specialist workshop has the nec- magnetic essary special skills, tools and qualifications field to correctly carry out any necessary work on strength your vehicle. This particularly applies to 2.4 GHz ISM Bluetooth® ≤ 100 mW work relevant to safety. waveband e.i.r.p. Observe the information contained in the (2400 MHz - Service Booklet. 2483.5 MHz) Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a smart centre: 76 GHz - 76 GHzRadar ≤ 55 dBm 77 GHz peak e.i.r.p. Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Diagnostics connection Rmodifications, installations and conver- sions The diagnostics connection is only intended Rwork on electronic components for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. Rreplacing the 12 V battery within the pre- scribed interval, at the latest every three G WARNING years If you connect equipment to a diagnostics You can obtain current information concern- connection in the vehicle, it may affect the ing the servicing of your vehicle at any time from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a operation of vehicle systems. As a result, smart centre. the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics Replacing the 12 V battery connection in the vehicle, which is Observe the notes on the 12 V battery. approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- smart recommends that you have the 12 V Benz. battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a smart centre. G WARNING If you intend to replace the battery yourself, Objects in the driver's footwell may please observe the following points: restrict the clearance around the pedals or Ralways replace a defective battery with a block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises battery which fulfils the specific vehicle the operating and road safety of the vehi- requirements cle. There is a risk of an accident. The vehicle is equipped with either an AGM Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology battery or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle func- that they do not get into the driver's foot- tionality is only guaranteed with a battery well. Always fit the floormats securely and of the same technology. smart recommends as prescribed in order to ensure that there that you only use batteries of the same is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do technology which have been tested and not use loose floormats and do not place approved for your vehicle. several floormats on top of one another. Rcarry over detachable parts, e.g. the breather hose, angled connecting piece or ! If the engine is switched off and a device terminal cover from the battery which is is connected to a diagnostic connection, being replaced the battery may become discharged. Rmake sure that the breather hose is always connected to the original opening on the battery side >> Introduction. 25

Fit current or newly delivered cell caps. trical system checked by a qualified spe- Otherwise, gases or battery acid may leak. cialist workshop. Rmake sure that the detachable parts are reconnected in the same way

Vehicle registration smart may ask its smart centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. smart is only able to notify the vehicle owner about vehicle inspections if smart has the vehicle registration data. In the following cases, it is possible that a All of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical vehicle has not yet been registered in the system components are marked with yellow owner's name: warning stickers which warn you of the dan- Rthe vehicle was not purchased at an gers of high voltages. The cables of the vehi- authorised specialist dealer cle's high-voltage electrical system are Rthe vehicle has not yet been examined at a orange in colour. smart centre Observe the following before carrying out smart recommends registering the vehicle in general work such as changing a bulb or a smart centre. checking the coolant level: Notify smart as soon as possible if there is a Rthe ignition is switched off change of address or if ownership of the Rthe charging cable for charging the high- vehicles changes. This can be done at a smart voltage battery is disconnected centre, for example. Automatically switching off the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system High-voltage electrical system In order to prevent anyone coming into con- Danger of electric shock tact with high voltage, the high-voltage electrical system is generally switched off G DANGER automatically in the following cases: The vehicle's high voltage electrical sys- Rthe restraint systems are activated in the tem is under high voltage. If you modify event of an accident components in the vehicle's high-voltage Ran electrical short circuit is detected in the electrical system or touch damaged com- vehicle's high-voltage electrical system ponents, you may be electrocuted. The Ran electrical connection in the vehicle's components in the vehicle's high-voltage high-voltage electrical system is discon- nected electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visi- ble. There is a risk of fatal injury. High-voltage battery Do not touch any high-voltage components G WARNING after an accident and never modify the In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. pressure of the high-voltage battery could Have the vehicle towed away after an acci- exceed a critical value. In this case, flam- dent and the vehicle's high-voltage elec- mable gas escapes through a vent valve in

Z 26 >> Introduction.

the vehicle's underbody. The gas could QR codes for rescue card ignite. There is a risk of injury. In cases of unusual smells developing, The QR code is affixed on the charge socket smoke or burn marks, stop the charging flap and on the door pillar (B-pillar), on the opposite side. In the event of an accident, process immediately. rescue services can use the QR code to Leave the danger area immediately. Secure quickly determine the corresponding rescue the danger area at a suitable distance. card for a vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information Contact a qualified specialist workshop. about the vehicle in compact form, such as the routing of the electric cables. Further G WARNING information: www.mercedes-benz.de/qr- If the housing of the high-voltage battery code has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out. These are poisonous and caustic. There is a risk of injury. Data stored in the vehicle Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth- Electronic control units ing. Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek medical Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control units. Some of them are necessary for attention straight away. your vehicle to function safely, some provide support when driving (driver assistance systems). In addition, your vehicle offers Correct use comfort or entertainment functions which are also made possible with electronic con- If warning stickers are removed, you may fail trol units. to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning Electronic control units contain data memo- stickers in place. ries which can permanently or temporarily The following are important sources of infor- store technical information on vehicle con- mation in regard to vehicle use: dition, component stress, service require- Rsafety notes in this Owner's Manual ments as well as technical incidents and faults. Rtechnical data in this Owner's Manual This information generally documents the Rtraffic rules and regulations condition of a component, a module, a system Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to or of the environment such as: motor vehicles Roperating states of system components (e.g. fluid levels, battery status, tyre pres- sure) Implied warranty Rstatus messages of the vehicle or its indi- ! Follow the instructions in this manual vidual components (e.g. wheel revolu- about the proper operation of your vehicle tions/speed, deceleration in movement, as well as about possible vehicle damage. lateral acceleration, display of seat belts Damage to your vehicle that arises from fastened) culpable contraventions against these Rmalfunctions and defects in key system instructions is not covered either by the components (e.g. the lights and brakes) smart implied warranty or by the New or Rinformation on incidents in which the Used-Vehicle Warranty. vehicle is damaged Rreactions of the systems in specific driv- ing situations (e.g. deployment of an air- bag, use of stability control systems) Rambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain sensor) >> Introduction. 27

In addition to the provision of control unit Depending on the equipment, these include, functions, this data serves to detect and rec- for example: tify faults as well as to optimise vehicle Rsettings for seat and steering wheel posi- functions by the manufacturer. Most of this tions data is volatile and is only processed in the vehicle itself. Only a small proportion of the Rsuspension and air-conditioning settings data is stored in event or error memories. Rindividualisation such as interior lighting When service work is carried out on your If your vehicle is suitably equipped, you can vehicle, the technical data from the vehicle connect your mobile phone or another mobile can be read out by service network staff (e.g. end device with the vehicle. You can operate workshops, manufacturers) or third parties these devices via the control elements inte- (e.g. breakdown services). Service work is, for grated in the vehicle. Images and sound from example, repair work, maintenance, war- the mobile phone can played back via the ranty claims and quality assurance meas- multimedia system. At the same time, certain ures. The data is read out via the legally pre- information is transferred to your mobile scribed connection for the diagnostics con- phone. nection in the vehicle. The respective work- This includes, depending on the type of inte- shop of service network or third parties col- gration, for example: lect, process and use the data. The data docu- Rgeneral vehicle status ments technical states of the vehicle, help in finding errors and in improving quality and Rposition data are transferred to the manufacturer if nec- This allows the use of selected mobile phone essary. In addition, the manufacturer is sub- apps, e.g. navigation or music playback. ject to product liability. For this purpose, the There is no further interaction between manufacturer requires technical data from mobile phone and vehicle; in particular there vehicles. is no active access to vehicle data. The pro- Error memories in the vehicle can be reset by vider of the app being used determines how a service outlet during repairs or service the data may be further processed. Which work. settings you can adjust, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of Depending on the equipment selected, you your mobile phone. can enter data in comfort and infotainment functions of the vehicle. This includes, for example: Online services Rmultimedia data, such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated mul- Wireless network connection timedia system Raddress book data for use in an integrated If your vehicle has a wireless network con- hands-free system or an integrated navi- nection, this will permit the exchange of data gation system between your vehicle and further systems. The wireless network connection is enabled Rnavigation destinations entered by a transmission and reception device Rdata on the use of Internet services belonging to the vehicle or via mobile end This data can be saved locally in the vehicle devices (e.g. mobile phones) you bring into or it is located on a device which you have the vehicle. Online functions can be used via connected to the vehicle (e.g. smartphone, this wireless network connection. These USB memory stick or MP3 player). If this data include online services and applications/ is saved in the vehicle, you can delete it at apps, which are provided by the manufac- any time. Transfer of this data to third par- turer or by other providers. ties only occurs at your request, especially as part of online services according to the Manufacturer's own services settings you have selected. You can save comfort settings/individuali- Regarding online services of the manufac- sation in the vehicle and change them at any turer, the individual functions are described time. by the manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g.

Z 28 >> Introduction.

Owner's Manual, the manufacturer's website) along with the relevant data protection information. Personal identification data may be used to provide online services. The data exchange for this takes place via a secure connection, e.g. with the manufactur- er's IT systems intended for the purpose. The collecting, processing, and use of personal identification data beyond the provision of services occurs exclusively on the basis of a legal permit or after due consent. Generally, you can enable or disable the services and functions (which sometimes have associated costs). In some cases, this also applies to the whole data connection of the vehicle. Excluded from this are special legally prescribed functions and services.

Services of third parties If it is possible to use online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. The manufac- turer has no influence on the contents exchanged whilst using these services. Please ask the respective service provider for details on the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data in the context of third party services.

Copyright information

Information on licenses of Free and Open- Source software used in the vehicle and the electronic components: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Cockpit 29

Cockpit >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Charge level display 67 D Climate control system Power display 67 control panel 92 ; Instrument cluster 34 E Ignition lock 62 = Horn F Control panel for: Lane Keeping Assist 70 ? Instrument cluster multi- function lever 103 Parking aid 98 Windscreen wipers combi- Acoustic presence indica- nation switch 84 tor 65 Headlamp range adjust- A Automatic locking feature 87 ment 83 Hazard warning lamps 167 G Lights combination switch 82 B Overhead control panel 32 C smart Audio-System 108 smart Media-System 116 30 Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Colour display of the A ° Calls up the last speed instrument cluster 102 stored 72 Monochrome display of the Interrupts cruise instrument cluster 102 B ± control or the limiter 72 ; smart Audio-System 108 C ¯ Activates cruise con- smart Media-System 116 trol 72 = Only for instrument cluster ^ Deactivates cruise with colour display: control or the limiter 72 WX Adjusts the vol- È Activates limiter 72 ume 116 D Only for instrument cluster Switches voice-oper- with colour display: ated control on or off and 9: Scrolls through accepts or ends a call 116 menus 103 ? ® Increases or stores a Confirms the selec- the current speed 72 tion 105 g Decreases current speed 72 Centre console with drawer 31

Centre console with drawer >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Cup holders 144 B Cigarette lighter 96 Ashtray 96 12 V socket 96 ; Drawer 144 C smart Media-System: AUX port, USB port and SD card = smart fortwo coupé: coin slot 116 holder D Cup holders 144 = smart fortwo cabrio: opens and closes the soft top 89 E Selector lever indicator 64 ? Selector lever 64 F ECO mode 66 A Parking brake 63 32 Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Left-hand reading lamp 84 ? PASSENGER AIRBAG indica- tor lamps 40 ; Interior lighting 84 A Rear-view mirror 60 = Right-hand reading lamp 84 Door control panel 33

Door control panel >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 87 = Opens and closes the side windows 89 ; Adjusts the exterior mir- rors 61 34 Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display

Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display >> At a glance.

Function Page Function Page : Speedometer à Lane Keeping Assist 196 ; Display # 12 V battery 198 = Warning and indicator R Rear foglamp 83 lamps O Foglamps 83 C Doors or tailgate 183 K Main-beam headlamps 82 7 Seat belts 184 L Dipped-beam headlamps 82 6 Restraint system 184 T Side lamps 83 þ Drive diagnostics 187 è Charging cable 187 J Brakes 186 ¯ Cruise control 197 ! ABS 190 È Limiter 197 ÷ ESP® 56 b Brake lights, rain or light h Tyre pressure monitor 192 sensors 198 D Power steering 195 ¯ Next service due date · Collision warning 195 ° 187 ^ Active Brake Assist 54 õ READY indicator 198 Occupant safety 35

Occupant safety protective function by failing in an acci- dent or triggering unexpectedly, for exam- Restraint system ple. There is an increased risk of injury, Protection provided by the restraint sys- possibly even fatal. tem Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well The restraint system comprises: as electronic components or their software. RSeat belt system RAirbags If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, RChild restraint system >> Safety. contact a qualified specialist workshop. RChild seat securing system smart recommends that you use driving aids In the event of an accident, the restraint sys- which have been approved specifically for tem can: your vehicle by smart. Rreduce the risk of vehicle occupants com- ing into contact with parts of the vehicle Preparing the restraint system for oper- interior. ation Rreduce the forces to which vehicle occu- pants are subjected When the ignition is switched on, the 6 Only a seat belt which is worn correctly can restraint system warning lamp lights up provide the intended level of protection. The during the self-check. It goes out no later belt tensioners and/or airbags can comple- than a few seconds after the vehicle is star- ment a correctly worn seat belt depending on ted. The components of the restraint system the detected accident situation. Belt ten- are then ready for operation. sioners and airbags are not necessarily deployed in every accident. Restraint system malfunctions For the restraint system to provide its full RThe restraint system warning lamp 6 protection, each occupant has to: does not light up when the ignition is Rhave the seat belt fastened correctly switched on. Rbe in an almost upright position with their RThe restraint system warning lamp 6 is back against the seat backrest constantly lit or lights up repeatedly when Rsit with their feet resting on the floor, if driving. possible In the event of an accident, the vehicle's Rif below 1.50 m in height, be secured using high-voltage electrical system may not be an additional restraint system suitable for deactivated as intended if there is a mal- your vehicle function in the restraint system. However, no system available today can DANGER completely eliminate injuries and fatalities G in every accident situation. In particular, If the restraint system is malfunctioning, seat belts and airbags generally do not pro- restraint system components may be trig- tect against objects penetrating the vehicle gered unintentionally or may not deploy from the outside. The risk of an injury result- as intended during an accident. This may ing from airbag deployment cannot be ruled affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for out entirely either. example. Furthermore, in the event of an accident, the vehicle's high-voltage elec- Limited protection from restraint system trical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may be electrocuted if you G WARNING touch the damaged components of the If the restraint system is modified, it may vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended

Z 36 Occupant safety

This poses an increased risk of injury or The restraint system components can be even fatal injury. activated or triggered independently of each other: Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- Components Detected trigger sit- cialist workshop. After an accident, switch uation off the ignition immediately and remove Belt tensioners Frontal collision, the key from the ignition lock. rear collision, side impact, overturn1 Restraint system response during an Driver's airbag, Head-on collision >> Safety. accident front passenger front airbag and How the restraint system works depends on knee airbag the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident: Sidebag Side impact Rhead-on collision Windowbag2 or Side impact, over- Rrear collision headbag3 turn1, frontal colli- Rside impact sion Roverturn1 The activation threshold for the restraint WARNING system components is determined based on G the analysis of the sensor values measured at After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts various points in the vehicle. This process is are hot. There is a risk of injury. pre-emptive in nature. The triggering proc- Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a ess of the restraint system components deployed airbag replaced at a qualified should take place in good time at the start of specialist workshop as soon as possible. the collision. Factors which can only be seen and meas- i smart recommends that you have the ured after a collision has occurred do not vehicle towed to a qualified specialist play a decisive role in the deployment of an workshop after an accident. Take this into airbag, nor do they provide an indication of account, particularly if a belt tensioner airbag deployment. was triggered or an airbag was deployed. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the If the belt tensioners are triggered or an air- case if only parts which are relatively easily bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle small amount of powder may also be deceleration is not high. Conversely, an air- released: bag may be deployed even though the vehicle Rthe bang will not usually affect your hear- suffers only minor deformation. If, for ing. instance, very rigid car parts such as longi- Rin general, the powder released is not haz- tudinal body members are hit, the rate of ardous to health but may cause short-term vehicle deceleration may be sufficient. breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary condi- tions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehi- cle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

1 Only for certain countries. 2 smart fortwo coupé. 3 smart fortwo cabrio. Occupant safety 37

Seat belts notes on "Loading the vehicle" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 145). Protection provided by seat belts Also make sure that objects are never placed between an occupant and the seat, Always fasten seat belts correctly before e.g. a cushion. commencing your journey. A seat belt can only provide maximum protection when worn If children are travelling in the vehicle, be correctly. sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" G WARNING (Y page 41). If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it can- not perform its intended protective func- Limited protection from seat belts >> Safety. tion. Furthermore, an incorrectly worn seat WARNING belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in G the event of an accident, heavy braking or The seat belt does not offer the intended sudden changes of direction. There is an level of protection if you have not moved increased risk of injury, possibly even the backrest to an almost vertical position. fatal. When braking or in the event of an acci- dent, you could slide underneath the seat Always ensure that all vehicle occupants belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, have their seat belts fastened correctly for example. This poses an increased risk of and are sitting properly. injury or even fatal injury. Always observe the notes on correct driver's Adjust the seat properly before beginning seat position (Y page 57) and seat adjust- your journey. Always ensure that the ment (Y page 58). backrest is in an almost vertical position Every car occupant must observe the follow- and that the shoulder section of your seat- ing notes to ensure a properly worn seat belt belt is routed across the centre of your can provide full protection. shoulder. RThe seat belt must: - not be twisted and must be tight and fit WARNING snugly across your body G Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the - be routed across the centre of the shoul- der and as low down across your hips as seat belts correctly without an additional possible suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is Rthe shoulder section of the belt should not worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its touch your neck nor be routed under your intended protective function. Further- arm or behind your back. more, an incorrectly worn seat belt can Ravoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event coat. of an accident, heavy braking or sudden Rpress the lap belt down into your hip joints changes of direction. There is an increased and pull taut by the shoulder section of the risk of injury, possibly even fatal. belt. The lap belt must never be routed across your stomach or abdomen. Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in additional suitable restraint systems. Rnever route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects. Ronly one person per seat belt. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. Rnever secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the

Z 38 Occupant safety

WARNING protective function and must be replaced. G Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Rthey are damaged, have been modified, Fastening and releasing the seat belt are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot extremely dirty be pulled out any further. Rmodifications have been made to the belt ! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia not engage the seat belt tongue in the

>> Safety. reels buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise, Seat belts may sustain non-visible dam- in the event of an accident the belt ten- sioner could be triggered in addition to age in an accident, e.g. due to glass splint- other systems and would need to be ers. Modified or damaged seat belts can replaced. tear or fail, for example in the event of an For easy fastening, the seat belt passes accident. Modified seat belt tensioners through the seat belt guide on the side of the may be deployed unintentionally or not seat, if available. function as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify seat belts, seat belt tension- ers, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. After an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

smart recommends that you only use seat belts that have been approved specifically for your vehicle by smart. : Buckle G WARNING ; Belt tongue Pyrotechnical belt tensioners which have X To fasten: always engage belt tongue ; of been triggered are no longer operational the seat belt in buckle : of the corre- and therefore cannot protect as intended. sponding seat. There is an increased risk of injury, pos- X To unfasten: press the release button in sibly even fatal. belt buckle : and use belt tongue ; to guide the belt back. Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger smart recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the after an accident. instrument cluster reminds you that all vehicle occupants must fasten their seat ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled belts correctly. up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue A warning tone may also sound. will be trapped in the door or in the seat As soon as the driver and co-driver fasten mechanism. This could damage the door, their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- out. aged seat belts can no longer fulfil their Occupant safety 39 i If you use an ISOFIX or i-Size child The front passenger front airbag can be restraint system on the co-driver's seat deployed in an accident only if the where the child is not secured using the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. seat belt from the co-driver's seat, the seat If the front passenger seat is occupied, make belt warning can be activated. In this case sure both before and during the journey that you can insert the seat belt tongue of the the status of the front passenger front airbag seat belt into the belt buckle belonging to is correct (Y page 40). the co-driver's seat. When doing so, route the seat belt between the ISOFIX or i-Size Protection provided by the airbags child restraint system and the backrest of the co-driver's seat. Depending on the accident situation, an air- bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt >> Safety. and can increase protection. Airbags G WARNING Overview of airbags If you deviate from the correct seat posi- tion, the airbag cannot perform its inten- ded protective function and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. In order to avoid such risks, always ensure that all vehicle occupants: Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, includ- ing pregnant women Rare seated correctly and maintain the furthest possible distance from the air- The installation location of an airbag is bags identified by the AIRBAG symbol. Robserve the following notes When deployed, an airbag may increase pro- tection for the corresponding vehicle occu- Always ensure that there are no objects pant. located between the airbag and the vehicle occupant. AIRBAG Possible protection for: To avoid risks resulting from a deployed air- : Headbag4 Head bag: Radjust the seats properly before beginning ; Driver's Thigh, knee, lower leg your journey. Move the driver's and co- kneebag driver's seats as far back as possible = Driver's air- Head and thorax Always observe the information on the bag correct driver's seat position (Y page 57). Rhold the steering wheel by the rim only. ? Front Head and thorax This allows the airbag to deploy fully passenger front airbag Ralways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or against A Windowbag5 Head the door or side window. Otherwise, you are in the airbags' deployment area B Sidebag Thorax and pelvis

4 smart fortwo cabrio. 5 smart fortwo coupé.

Z 40 Occupant safety

Rfeet should always be placed on the WARNING ground. Do not place your feet on the dash- G board, for example. Otherwise, your feet Sensors to control the airbags are located are in the airbag's deployment area in the doors. Modifications or work not per- Rwhen travelling with children in the vehi- formed correctly to the doors or door pan- cle, observe the additional notes elling, as well as damaged doors, can lead (Y page 41) to the function of the sensors being Ralways stow objects correctly and securely impaired. The airbags might therefore not Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent function properly any more. Consequently, the airbag from functioning correctly. the airbags cannot protect vehicle occu-

>> Safety. Therefore, always make sure that: pants as they are designed to do. This Rthere are no people, animals or objects poses an increased risk of injury. between the vehicle occupants and the Never modify the doors or parts of the airbag doors. Always have work on the doors or Rthere are no objects between the seat, door door panelling carried out at a qualified and B-pillar specialist workshop. Rthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hang- ers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks G WARNING Rthere are no accessories, such as drinks An airbag that has been deployed once can holders, attached in the airbag's cannot provide any further protection and, deployment area, e.g. on doors, side win- in the event of an accident, can no longer dows or side trim panels perform its intended protective function. Rthere are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile There is an increased risk of injury. objects in the pockets of your clothing. Stow such objects in a suitable place Have the vehicle towed to a qualified spe- cialist workshop to have the deployed air- Limited protection from airbags bag replaced.

WARNING Have deployed airbags replaced immedi- G ately. If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag Status of the front passenger front airbag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps Never modify an airbag cover or affix The front passenger front airbag can be ena- objects to it. bled or disabled using the airbag-off switch in the instrument panel on the front G WARNING passenger side (Y page 50). Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been spe- cifically approved for the respective seat by smart. Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 41

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER Bear in mind that negligence when securing AIR BAG ON indicator lamps are part of the the child in the child restraint system may front passenger front airbag deactivation have serious consequences. Always be con- system. sistent and secure a child carefully before The indicator lamps display the status of the each journey. front passenger front airbag: To improve protection for children younger than twelve years old and under 1.50 m in RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front passenger front airbag is deactiva- height, smart recommends you always ted. It will then not be deployed in the observe the following notes: event of an accident. RAlways secure the child in a child restraint

RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front system suitable for your smart vehicle. >> Safety. passenger front airbag is activated. The RThe child restraint system must be appro- front passenger front airbag may deploy priate to the age, weight and size of the during an accident. child. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make RThe vehicle seat must be suitable for the sure that the status of the front passenger child restraint system to be fitted front airbag is correct depending on the sit- (Y page 45). uation both before and during the journey: RChildren in a child restraint system: The generic term child restraint system whether the front passenger front airbag should be enabled or disabled depends on The generic term child restraint system is the child restraint system fitted and the used in this Owner's Manual. A child age and size of the child. Be sure to observe restraint system is, for example: the notes on "Children in the vehicle" Ra baby car seat (Y page 41). There, you will also find Ra rearward-facing child seat information on rearward- or forward- Ra forward-facing child seat facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. Ra child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guides RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp must be lit. The front The child restraint system must be appro- passenger front airbag is activated. Be priate to the age, weight and size of the child. sure to read the notes on "Seat belts" (Y page 37) and "Airbags" (Y page 39). Observing laws and regulations There, you can also find information on the correct seat position. Be sure to observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the Observe the information on the airbag deac- vehicle. tivation system of the front passenger front airbag ( page 50). Ensure that the child restraint system is Y approved in accordance with the valid test specifications and guidelines. Further infor- mation can be obtained at a qualified spe- Travelling safely with children in the cialist workshop. smart recommends that vehicle you use a smart Centre. Observe carefully when children trav- Use only approved child restraint sys- elling in the vehicle tems Being consistent Only child restraint systems that meet the i Be sure to observe the safety notes rele- following UNECE standards are permitted for vant to the situation. In doing so, you will use in the vehicle: be able to identify possible risks and avoid RUN-R44 dangers when children are travelling in RUN-R129 (i‑Size child restraint systems) the vehicle (Y page 42).

Z 42 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Information about the approval categories change in direction, the child may not be for child restraint systems and details on the held securely. There is an increased risk of approval label on the child restraint system serious or even fatal injuries. (Y page 45). Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the Detecting risks, avoiding danger child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system Securing systems for child restraint sys- is resting on the seat surface. Never place tems in the vehicle objects under or behind the child restraint

>> Safety. Only use the following securing systems for system, e.g. cushions. Only use child child restraint systems: restraint systems with the original cover Rthe ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings designed for them. Only replace damaged Rthe vehicle's seat belt system covers with genuine covers. RTop Tether anchorages Preferably, fit an ISOFIX or i‑Size child G WARNING restraint system. If the child restraint system is fitted incor- The risk of incorrectly fitting the child rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in restraint system can be reduced by simply the event of an accident, heavy braking or fitting it on the securing rings of the vehicle. a sudden change in direction. The child When the child is secured using the safety restraint system could be thrown about, belt integrated in the ISOFIX or i-Size child striking vehicle occupants. There is an restraint system, be sure to observe the max- increased risk of injury, possibly even imum permissible weight of the child and fatal. child restraint system together (Y page 48). Always fit child restraint systems prop- The advantage of a rearward-facing erly, even if they are not being used. Make child restraint system sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation Babies or infants should preferably travel in instructions. a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child is seated in the RBe sure to observe the installation and opposite direction to the direction of travel operating instructions provided by the and is facing backwards. manufacturer for the child restraint sys- Babies and infants have comparatively tem being used as well as the vehicle-spe- poorly developed neck muscles in relation to cific notes at all times: the size and weight of their head. A rear- - Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child ward-facing child restraint system can restraint system to the front passenger reduce the risk of injury to the cervical spine seat ( page 48). in an accident. Y - Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat Secure the child restraint system cor- (Y page 53). Observe the specific notes rectly at all times on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. G WARNING If the front passenger seat is occupied, If the child restraint system is incorrectly make sure that the status of the front fitted on the seat position suitable for this passenger front airbag is correct purpose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 43

depending on the situation both before very hot. Children could be suffer burns by and during the journey. touching these parts, in particular on the RObserve the warning labels in the vehicle metallic parts of the child restraint sys- interior and on the child restraint system. tem. There is a risk of injury. RAlso secure Top Tether, if available. If you and your child leave the vehicle, Do not modify the child restraint system always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it G WARNING with a blanket, for example. If the child If you modify a child restraint system or restraint system has been exposed to affix objects to it, e.g. toys or unsuitable direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before >> Safety. accessories, the child restraint system securing the child in it. Never leave chil- may no longer function properly. This dren unattended in the vehicle. poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify a child restraint system. Observe the following when stopping or Only affix accessories which have been parking specially approved for this child restraint WARNING system by the child restraint system's G manufacturer. If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle smart recommends you use smart care prod- in motion if, for example, they: ucts to clean child restraint systems recom- Rrelease the parking brake mended by smart. Rshift the automatic transmission out of Only use child restraint systems which park position P are not damaged Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle G WARNING equipment and become trapped. There is a Child restraint systems or their securing risk of an accident and injury. systems that have been damaged or sub- When leaving the vehicle, always take the jected to a load in an accident cannot per- key with you and lock the vehicle. Never form their intended protective function. In leave children unattended in the vehicle. the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may WARNING not be held securely. There is an increased G If persons (particularly children) are risk of serious or even fatal injuries. exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged Immediately replace child restraint sys- period, there is a risk of serious or even tems that have been damaged or subjected fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- to a load in an accident. Have the child ticularly children) unattended in the vehi- restraint securing systems checked in a cle. qualified specialist workshop before fit- ting a child restraint system again.

Avoiding direct sunlight

G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become

Z 44 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Overview of recommended child restraint systems The smart fortwo is equipped with a manual front passenger front airbag deactivation sys- tem.

X Before using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, disable the front passenger front airbag (Y page 50). i You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from a quali- fied specialist workshop. smart recommends that you use a smart Centre. Securing with ISOFIX >> Safety. Weight group Model6 Order number7 Size class Approval number Group 0+: BABY SAFE plus B6 6 86 8224 up to 13 kg and up to approx- E1 04 301 146 imately 15 months Size category E Group I: DUO plus A 000 970 17 02 9–18 kg E1 04 301 133 Size category B1

Securing with the vehicle seat belt

Weight group Type6 Order number7 Approval number Group 0: BABY SAFE plus II A 000 970 13 02 up to 10 kg and up to approx- E1 04 301 146 imately 6 months Group 0+: BABY SAFE plus II A 000 970 13 02 up to 13 kg and up to approx- E1 04 301 146 imately 15 months Group I: DUO plus A 000 970 17 02 9–18 kg and from approx- E1 04 301 133 imately 9 months to 4 years Group II/III: KIDFIX A 000 970 20 02 15–36 kg and from approx- E1 04 301 198 imately 4–12 years Group II/III: KIDFIX XP A 000 970 23 02 15–36 kg and from approx- E1 04 301 304 imately 4–12 years

6 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 7 With colour code 9H95. Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 45

Suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system Securing systems for child restraint systems Vehicle seat Front passenger seat Preferred securing system: Be sure to observe: ISOFIX child seat RIf the front passenger seat securing system is occupied, make sure (Y page 46) that the status of the front or passenger front airbag is i‑Size child seat correct depending on the >> Safety. securing system situation both before and during the journey. (Y page 48) Also secure Top Tether if available (Y page 50) Other securing system: RVehicle seat belt (Y page 52)

Permitted categories for child restraint Approval categories in accordance with systems UN-R44 Use only approved child restraint sys- tems Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle: RUN-R44 RUN-R129 (i‑Size child restraint systems)

Identification on the child restraint sys- tem Example of an approval label Information about the approval category, weight category and approval number, for RUniversal: child restraint systems in the example, is on the approval label on the child "Universal" category are approved for restraint system. installation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suit- Depending on the approval category of the ability of seats for securing child restraint child restraint system, there may be further systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF. information, e.g. the ISOFIX size category. The designation IUF refers to an ISOFIX child restraint system in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or a supporting bracket. RSemi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "semi-universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in

Z 46 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

the child restraint system manufacturer's lation in vehicles with i‑Size securing vehicle model list. rings. They can be used, in accordance RVehicle-specific: child restraint systems with overviews of the suitability of seats in the "vehicle-specific" category may for securing child restraint systems, on only be used if the vehicle and the seat are seats labelled i-U. listed in the child restraint system man- The designation i-U refers to an i-Size ufacturer's vehicle model list. child restraint system in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems Approval categories in accordance with must also be secured using Top Tether or a UN-R129 supporting bracket. >> Safety. Observe the suitability of vehicle seats Depending on the approval category, there are forward-facing and/or rearward-facing child restraint systems. Usage may be limi- ted for certain vehicle seats. RSuitability of seats for securing ISOFIX child restraint systems (Y page 46) RSuitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems (Y page 48) RSuitability of seats for securing a belt- secured child restraint system Example of an approval label (Y page 52) Ri‑Size: child restraint systems in the "i‑Size" category are approved for instal-

Securing the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

ISOFIX identification ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for special restraint systems. RThis symbol indicates which seats are suitable for securing an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN-R44. ROnly secure child restraint systems approved by UN-R44 in accordance with the following ISOFIX tables.

Carry cot Size class Equipment Front passenger front airbag Front passenger front airbag is enabled is disabled1 F ISO/L1 X X G ISO/L2 X X X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front restraint system in this weight category passenger front airbag deactivation sys- and/or size category. tem. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp must be lit. Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 47

Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approximately 6 months) Size class Equipment Front passenger front airbag Front passenger front airbag is enabled is disabled1 E ISO/R1 X IL X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front restraint system in this weight category passenger front airbag deactivation sys- and/or size category. tem. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp must be lit.

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint >> Safety. systems in accordance with the table in "Overview of recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approximately 15 months) Size class Equipment Front passenger front airbag Front passenger front airbag is enabled is disabled1 E ISO/R1 X IL D ISO/R2 X IL C ISO/R3 X IL X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front restraint system in this weight category passenger front airbag deactivation sys- and/or size category. tem. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp must be lit. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Overview of recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Weight category I (9‑18 kg and approximately 9 months to 4 years) Size class Equipment Front passenger front airbag Front passenger front airbag is enabled is disabled1 D ISO/R2 X IL C ISO/R3 X IL B ISO/F2 IUF IUF B1 ISO/F2X IUF IUF

Z 48 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Size class Equipment Front passenger front airbag Front passenger front airbag is enabled is disabled1 A ISO/F3 IUF IUF X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front restraint system in this weight category passenger front airbag deactivation sys- and/or size category. tem. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX cator lamp must be lit. child restraint systems in the "Univer- IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint sal" category in this weight category. systems in accordance with the table in >> Safety. "Overview of recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Suitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size child restraint systems

i‑Size identification i‑Size is a standardised securing system for special restraint systems. RThis symbol indicates which seats are suitable for securing an i‑Size child restraint system in accordance with UN-R129. RChild restraint systems which have been approved in accordance with the following may be secured: - UN-R44 in accordance with the ISOFIX tables (Y page 46) - UN-R129 in accordance with the following i‑Size table

Front passenger front airbag Front passenger front airbag is enabled is disabled1 i‑Size child restraint system i-UF i‑U i-UF Suitable for a forward-facing i‑Size 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front child restraint system in the "Universal" passenger front airbag deactivation sys- category. tem. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp must be lit. i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i‑Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.

Installing an ISOFIX or i-Size child integrated seat belt of the child restraint restraint system on the front passenger system, the permissible gross weight of seat the child and the child restraint system is 33 kg. WARNING G If the child together with the child For ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys- restraint system weighs more than 33 kg, tems, where the child is secured using the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 49

with integrated seat belt no longer offer the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing sufficient protection. ISOFIX or i‑Size child the wrong direction. seat securing systems may be overloaded and will not be able to restrain the child, When fitting an i-Size child restraint for example, in the event of an accident. system, also observe the following: This poses an increased risk of injury or O When using a forward-facing child even fatal injury. restraint system: remove the head If the child together with the child restraint from the respective seat, if restraint system weighs more than 33 kg , possible. In addition, the seat backrest of the child restraint system must, as far only use ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint >> Safety. as possible, lie flat against the backrest systems with which the child is secured of the vehicle seat. with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always observe the information on the weight of the child restraint system: Rin the installation and operating instruc- tions provided by the manufacturer for the child restraint system being used Ron the label of the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the maximum permis- sible weight of the child and child restraint system together is still complied with. When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the following: O Be sure to observe the correct use and the suitability of seats for securing a child restraint system. ISOFIX child seat securing system (Y page 46) i‑Size child seat securing system (Y page 48) O Be sure to observe the installation and : ISOFIX securing rings operating instructions provided by the manufacturer for the child restraint ; i-Size securing rings system being used. Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both When fitting an ISOFIX child restraint ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings. system, also observe the following: X Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys- O For certain child restraint systems in tem on both securing rings of the vehicle. weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size set- ting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and

Z 50 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Securing Top Tether Ensure that: RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ; as shown If the child restraint system is equip- RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted ped with a Top Tether belt: X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Be sure to com- Top Tether can reduce the risk of injury. The ply with the child restraint system man- Top Tether belt provides an additional con- ufacturer's installation instructions when nection between the child restraint system doing so. secured with ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle. >> Safety. Disabling or enabling the front passenger front airbag

G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air- bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot per- form its intended protective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the per- son is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. You may only transport a child on the front-passenger seat if they are seated in a suitable rearward or forward- facing child restraint system. Always observe the information about suitable Top Tether anchorage is fitted to the lug- ; positioning of the child restraint system in gage compartment floor. this Owner's Manual as well as the child Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys- X restraint system manufacturer's installa- tem with Top Tether. Be sure to comply with the child restraint system manufac- tion instructions. turer's installation instructions when doing so. G WARNING X Route Top Tether belt ? back over the If you secure a child in a rearward-facing head restraint, keeping it as central as child restraint system on the front- possible, into the luggage compartment passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR through loop :. BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, the front- X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether passenger front airbag can deploy in the belt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;. event of an accident. The child could be Lift up the carpet a little if necessary. struck by the airbag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 51

Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG >> Safety. ON indicator lamp lights up, do not fit a rear- ward-facing child restraint system on the Symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint front passenger seat. Further information system can be found under "Problems with the front If you use a rearward-facing child restraint passenger front airbag shutoff" (Y page 184). system on the front passenger seat, you must disable the front passenger front airbag. G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and you position the front- passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is on. This poses an increased risk of injury or Airbag-off switch :, to enable and disable even fatal injury. the front passenger front airbag manually, is in the dashboard on the front passenger side. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the X Press front passenger front airbag-off shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from switch : in beyond the point of resist- ance. the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt To disable the front passenger front airbag: guide on the child restraint system. The X turn airbag-off switch : anti-clockwise. shoulder belt strap must be routed for- The 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- wards and downwards from the vehicle tor lamp on the overhead control panel belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front- lights up and remains lit up continuously passenger seat accordingly. Additionally, when the ignition is switched on always observe the information on suita- (Y page 40). ble positioning of the child restraint sys- X To enable the front passenger front airbag: tem in this Owner's Manual in addition to turn airbag-off switch : clockwise. the child restraint system manufacturer's The × PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp on the overhead control panel lights installation instructions. up and remains lit up continuously when the ignition is switched on (Y page 40). The front passenger front airbag is generally enabled when the ignition is switched on, except when the front passenger front airbag has been disabled manually. When the front

Z 52 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

passenger front airbag is disabled, the 4 up continuously when the ignition is PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on switched on. the overhead control panel (Y page 40) lights

Attaching a child restraint system with the seat belt Notes on the suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint sys- tems Front passenger seat – notes >> Safety. Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

RObserve the specific notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys- tems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front passenger front airbag is correct depending on the situation both before and during the journey.

Weight group Front passenger front airbag Front passenger front airbag is enabled is disabled1 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front passenger front airbag deactivation sys- tem. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp must be lit.

Group 0: up to 10 kg X U, L Group 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L Group I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L Group II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L Group III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U, L X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child U Suitable for child restraint systems in restraint system in this weight category the "Universal" category in this weight and/or size category. category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems in the "Universal" cat- restraint systems in accordance with the egory in this weight category. table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Notes on rearward and forward facing passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR child restraint systems on the front BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front- passenger seat passenger front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be WARNING G struck by the airbag. This poses an If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front- Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 53

increased risk of injury or even fatal Attaching a child restraint system with injury. the seat belt to the front passenger seat Make sure that the front-passenger front When fitting a belt-secured child restraint airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER system on the front passenger seat, always AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. observe the following: NEVER use a rearward-facing child O Be sure to observe the installation and restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE operating instructions provided by the manufacturer for the child restraint AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS system being used. INJURY to the child can occur.

O When using a "Universal" or "Semi-Uni- >> Safety. Observe the specific notes on rearward- versal" category child restraint system, facing and forward-facing child restraint ensure that it is approved for the vehicle systems. seat. Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for securing belt-secured child restraint systems" (Y page 52). O The backrest of a forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, rest flat against the backrest of the front passenger seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size set- ting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor put under strain between the roof and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing always pay attention to the status of the the wrong direction. front passenger front airbag. O The child restraint system must not be RIf you fit a child restraint system on the put under strain by the head restraint. front passenger seat, be sure to observe O Never place objects, such as cushions, the notes on disabling the front passenger under or behind the child restraint sys- front airbag. tem. RWhen using a rearward-facing child X Set the front passenger seat as far back as restraint system on the front passenger possible. seat, the front passenger front airbag must always be deactivated. This is only the X Adjust the seat backrest to an almost ver- case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- tical position. cator lamp is lit continuously. X Fit the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint sys- RIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out, the front passenger front tem must always rest on the seat cushion airbag is activated. The front passenger of the front passenger seat. front airbag may deploy during an acci- X Always make sure that the shoulder belt dent. strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. X If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat as appropriate.

Z 54 Driving safely

Pets in the vehicle smart centre or a qualified specialist work- shop.

G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or Braking with ABS (Anti-lock Braking unsecured in the vehicle, they may press System) buttons or switches, for instance. ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way In this way, animals may: that the wheels do not lock when you brake. Ractivate vehicle equipment and become This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking.

>> Safety. trapped, for example When you switch on the ignition, the ! Rswitch systems on or off and thereby warning lamp in the instrument cluster endanger other road users lights up. It goes out after the engine is star- Furthermore, unsecured animals may be ted. flung around inside the vehicle in the ABS works from a speed of about 6 km/h, event of an accident or abrupt steering or regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS braking manoeuvre, and thereby injure intervenes in the case of slippery road sur- faces, even when you only brake gently. vehicle occupants. There is a risk of acci- dent and injury. X To brake while ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until Never leave animals unattended in the the braking situation is over. vehicle. X To make a full brake application: depress Always secure animals properly when the brake pedal with full force. driving, for instance with a suitable pet carrier. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking Driving safely characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety sys- Driving safety system limitations tems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. ! Make sure you have suitable tyres, so that assistance systems and driving Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked safety systems can work as effectively as immediately at a qualified specialist possible. workshop. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor Using Active Brake Assist override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist Useful information driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and With the help of the radar sensor system, for braking in good time. Always adapt your Active Brake Assist can calculate the dis- driving style to suit the prevailing road, tance of your vehicle to the vehicle travelling weather and traffic conditions and maintain in front. a safe distance from the vehicle in front. If for several seconds, the distance to the Drive carefully. vehicle ahead is insufficient for the speed For safety reasons, smart recommends that you are driving at, Active Brake Assist alerts you only use snow chains that have been the driver visually. specially approved for your vehicle by smart. If a risk of collision is detected, Active Brake Further information can be obtained at a Assist alerts the driver both visually and acoustically. In addition, Active Brake Assist Driving safely 55 prepares the vehicle for a possible emer- Deactivate Active Brake Assist. Have Active gency braking manoeuvre. Brake Assist checked at a qualified spe- In particularly critical situations Active cialist workshop. Brake Assist may brake autonomously. In this case, Active Brake Assist continues to The following requirements must also be ful- alert the driver both visually and acousti- filled: cally. Rthe selector lever is in position h. Please note Rthe parking brake is released. Rthe driving speed is within the suitable speed range. G WARNING >> Safety. Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly Detection can be restricted under the follow- identify objects and complex traffic situa- ing conditions: tions. Rthe vehicle is new or service work has been In these cases, Active Brake Assist may: carried out on the system. In this case, observe the information on running-in the Rwarn or brake for no reason vehicle. Rnot issue a warning Rthe radio sensors are dirty or covered ( page 163) Rnot brake Y Rin heavy rain or snow There is a risk of an accident. Rthere is interference from other radar Always pay careful attention to the traffic sources, e.g. in multi-storey car parks situation and do not rely on Active Brake Rthe vehicle travelling in front is narrow, Assist alone. Be prepared to brake or e.g. a motorcycle manoeuvre if necessary. Rthe vehicle travelling in front is travelling on a different line G WARNING Autonomous braking can be cancelled by Active Brake Assist does not react: briefly depressing the accelerator pedal. If the brake lamps are inoperative, deacti- Rto persons, bicycles, motorcycles or ani- vate Active Brake Assist. mals i Observe the notes on "Limitations of the Rto approaching vehicles driving safety systems" (Y page 54). Rto cross traffic Ron bends Distance warning and forward collision As a result, Active Brake Assist cannot warning with autonomous braking func- intervene in all critical situations. There is tion a risk of an accident. Method of operation Always pay careful attention to the traffic If the distance maintained to the vehicle situation and be prepared to brake. ahead is insufficient for the speed you are driving at, the · warning lamp lights up. G WARNING If Active Brake Assist detects a risk of colli- Severe jolting, for example in the case of a sion while driving, the · warning lamp collision, may cause the radar sensors to lights up and a warning tone sounds. If the be misaligned. The function of Active Brake driver depresses the brake pedal fast, the Assist is then impaired. braking pressure may be increased to a full brake application. There is a risk of an accident. The autonomous braking function may inter- vene if the driver does not react to the forward collision warning.

Z 56 Driving safely

When driving at speeds of more than 30 km/h, ESP® supports the driver when pulling away the forward collision warning may issue a on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also sta- warning in the following situations: bilise the vehicle during braking. ESP® com- prises ETS (Electronic Traction System) and Situation Speed you are trav- Crosswind Assist. elling ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if Vehicles travelling 30 - 140 km/h they spin. This enables you to pull away or ahead accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. Vehicles coming to a 30 - 140 km/h Strong crosswind gusts can impair the road- standstill

>> Safety. holding of your vehicle when driving Stationary vehicles 30 - 80 km/h straight ahead. Crosswind Assist reduces these impairments. Other objects or No warning possible Crosswind assist is active at vehicle speeds crossing vehicles above 70 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. When driving at speeds of more than 30 km/h, If ESP® intervenes, pull away carefully and the autonomous braking function may inter- adapt your driving style to the prevailing vene in the following situations: road and weather conditions. If the ÷ warning lamp goes out before Situation Speed you are trav- ® ® elling beginning the journey, ESP is active. If ESP intervenes, the ÷ warning lamp flashes in Vehicles travelling 30 - 140 km/h the instrument cluster. ahead G WARNING Vehicles coming to a 30 - 140 km/h If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to standstill stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other Stationary vehicles No intervention driving safety systems are switched off. possible This increases the risk of skidding and an Other objects or No intervention accident. crossing vehicles possible Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Activating or deactivating Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist is automatically activa- Information on EBD (Electronic Brake- ted when you start the engine. force Distribution) Monochrome display: activating/deactivat- EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- ing Active Brake Assist using the on-board sure on the rear wheels to improve driving computer (Y page 105). stability while braking. Colour display: activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist using the on-board com- G WARNING puter (Y page 106). If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an acci- Driving with ESP® dent. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating You should therefore adapt your driving from the direction desired by the driver, one style to the different handling character- or more wheels are braked to stabilise the istics. Have the brake system checked at a vehicle. qualified specialist workshop. Correct driver's seat position 57

Understanding functions of the key X To lock centrally: press the & button. The turn signals flash twice. X To activate the double-lock function (for United Kingdom only): press the & but- ton twice. The turn signals flash twice slowly and three times quickly.

Opening the door

X Press the # button on the key. X Open the door. : % Unlocks the vehicle i After unlocking, open the vehicle within approximately two minutes to prevent it ; º smart fortwo coupé: opens the upper tailgate (press and hold) from locking itself and priming the anti- theft alarm system again. ; º smart fortwo cabrio: opens the soft top (press and hold) = & Locks the vehicle Correct driver's seat position

G WARNING >> Entering and setting up. You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or : % Unlocks the vehicle mirror and fasten the seat belt before ; & Locks the vehicle starting the engine. = é smart fortwo coupé: opens the upper tailgate (press and hold) = é smart fortwo cabrio: opens the soft top (press and hold)

X To unlock centrally: press the % button. The turn signals flash once. i After unlocking, open the vehicle within approximately two minutes to prevent it from locking itself and priming the anti- theft alarm system again.

X To unlock and open the upper tailgate (smart fortwo coupé): press and hold the º or é button. X To open the soft top to the B-pillar (smart fortwo cabrio): press and hold the º or é button.

Z 58 Adjusting the seats

Observe the following rules on the correct WARNING driver's seat position: G When adjusting a seat, you or another Rthe driver must be as far away from the vehicle occupant could become trapped by driver's airbag as possible ( page 39). Y the guide rail of the seat, for instance. Rthe driver must be wearing seat belt = There is a risk of injury. properly. Rthe driver must be able to depress the ped- Make sure that no one has any part of their als properly. body within the sweep of the seat when Rthe driver must be able to move their legs adjusting it. freely. Rthe driver must be able to reach steering G WARNING wheel : with their arms slightly bent. The seat belt does not offer the intended Rthe driver must be able to see all the dis- level of protection if you have not moved plays in the instrument cluster clearly. the backrest to an almost vertical position. Rmove seat backrest ; to an almost vertical When braking or in the event of an acci- position. dent, you could slide underneath the seat Rsit in a normal upright position. belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, Rthe seat belt must fit snugly across your for example. This poses an increased risk of body. injury or even fatal injury. Rthe seat belt must be routed across the middle of your shoulder. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the

>> Entering and setting up. Rthe seat belt must be routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints. backrest is in an almost vertical position Radjust the rear-view and exterior mirrors and that the shoulder section of your seat- so that the driver has a good view of the belt is routed across the centre of your road and traffic. shoulder.

G WARNING Adjusting the seats The steering wheel may move unexpect- Please note edly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehi- G WARNING cle. There is a risk of an accident. If children adjust the seats, they could Make sure that the steering wheel is locked become trapped, especially if they are before driving off. Never unlock the steer- unattended. There is a risk of injury. ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never G WARNING leave children unattended in the vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: G WARNING Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel If the driver's seat is not correctly or mirror engaged, it could unexpectedly move while Rfasten the seat belt. driving. This could cause you to lose con- There is a risk of an accident. trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before Always ensure that the driver's seat is starting the engine. engaged before starting the vehicle. Adjusting the steering wheel 59

! Make sure that there are no objects in the Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with a footwell under or behind the seats when lever) moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be dam- X Pull lever : upwards. aged. X At the same time, move the backrest for- Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" wards or backwards. (Y page 39) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 41). Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with a handwheel) Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft posi- tion X Turn handwheel ? forwards or back- wards.

Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNING The steering wheel may move unexpect- edly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehi-

cle. There is a risk of an accident. >> Entering and setting up. Make sure that the steering wheel is locked Seat with a lever before driving off. Never unlock the steer- ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion.

G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or Seat with a handwheel mirror and fasten the seat belt before To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position, the starting the engine. seat belt must not be fastened. X Lift lever =. G WARNING X Slide the seat forwards or backwards. Children could become trapped by the The seat engages audibly. steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Adjusting the seat hight (seat with a key with you and lock the vehicle. Never lever only) leave children unattended in the vehicle.

X Pull handle ; up or push it down several times.

Z 60 Adjusting the mirrors

Understanding automatic anti-dazzle mode of interior mirror Please note

G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita- tion. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or X Fold down lever :. clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. X Set desired steering wheel height 2. X Fold up lever :. If you come into contact with the electro- X Check that the steering column is locked. lyte, observe the following: RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. Adjusting the mirrors RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of Adjusting the interior mirror your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immedi-

>> Entering and setting up. ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with elec- trolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek med- ical attention immediately. X Move the interior mirror up, down, left or right. Useful information The interior mirror automatically goes into Manually setting the interior mirror to anti-dazzle mode if simultaneously: anti-dazzle mode Rthe ignition is switched on Rincident light from headlamps hits the X Fold lever : forwards. sensor in the interior mirror The interior mirror does not go into anti- dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Using the armrest 61

Adjusting the exterior mirrors man- Adjusting the exterior mirrors electri- ually cally

G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. In order to adjust the exterior mirrors elec- trically, the ignition must be switched on. G WARNING X To select the left or right exterior mirror: The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the turn control = left 1 or right 2. image. Objects visible in the mirrors are X To adjust the exterior mirrors: move con- closer than they appear. You could mis- trol = up, down, left or right. judge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for >> Entering and setting up. instance. There is a risk of an accident. Using the armrest You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance Please note from road users driving behind you. ! Do not lean on the armrest with full force or it could become damaged.

X Move lever : up, down, left or right.

Z 62 Pulling away

Starting the engine Please note

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they can: Ropen doors and endanger other persons or road users Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and, for u To insert the key into the ignition lock example, trap themselves. 1 To switch on the power supply Children could also set the vehicle in 2 To switch on the ignition motion, for example by: 3 To start the engine

>> Driving. Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P Automatic transmission Rstarting the engine. X Turn the key to position 3. The READY indicator appears in the instru- There is a risk of an accident and injury. ment cluster. A tone sounds. When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Shift out of transmission position j or i. key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the key out of reach of chil- Pulling away dren. Please note WARNING G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the G key, the key could be unintentionally Objects in the driver's footwell can impede turned in the ignition lock. This could pedal travel or block a pedal which is cause the engine to be switched off. There depressed. This jeopardises safe operation is a risk of an accident. of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to Stow all objects in the vehicle safely, so the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before that they cannot reach the driver's foot- inserting the key into the ignition lock. well. Make sure the floormats and carpets are properly secured so that they cannot slip and obstruct the pedals. Do not lay several floormats or carpets on top of one another.

G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers Pulling away 63

There is a risk of an accident. lock. This increases the risk of skidding Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct and an accident. usage of the pedals. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do G WARNING not apply the parking brake too firmly. If If you switch off the ignition while driving, the wheels lock, release the parking brake safety-relevant functions are only avail- until the wheels begin turning again. able with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steer- G WARNING ing and the brake boosting effect. You will If you leave children unattended in the require considerably more effort to steer vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle and brake. There is a risk of an accident. in motion if, for example, they: Do not switch off the ignition while driv- Rrelease the parking brake ing. Rshift the automatic transmission out of >> Driving. Note the following when pulling away: park position P Rstart the engine RDo not drive with the parking brake applied. In addition, they may operate vehicle RUse caution when pulling away on slippery equipment and become trapped. There is a surfaces. risk of an accident and injury. RDo not allow tyres to spin. When leaving the vehicle, always take the RDepress the brake pedal and keep it key with you and lock the vehicle. Never depressed. leave children unattended in the vehicle. RPress the release button on the selector lever. Applying the parking brake RShift the gear selector lever to position h or k.

Using the parking brake Please note

G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can:

R overheat and cause a fire X Pull parking brake ; upwards. Rlose its hold function. The brake lights do not light up when you There is a risk of fire and an accident. brake the vehicle with the parking brake. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Releasing the parking brake

X depress the brake pedal and keep it G WARNING depressed. If you must brake the vehicle with the X Press release button : on parking parking brake, the braking distance is brake ; and move the parking brake down considerably longer and the wheels could to the stop.

Z 64 Automatic transmission

Hill start assist The following transmission positions are available: G WARNING Rj Park position After a while, hill start assist no longer Position j should not be used to brake the holds the vehicle and it may roll away. vehicle when parking. To secure the vehi- There is a risk of an accident and injury. cle, apply the parking brake in addition to shifting to transmission position . Therefore, quickly move your foot from the j brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never Rk Reverse gear leave the vehicle when it is held by hill Ri Neutral start assist. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Hill start assist keeps the vehicle in place Rh Drive when driving uphill as soon as the brake pedal is released. Hill start assist is only active in the follow- Changing the transmission position ing situations: >> Driving. Rwhen pulling away on an uphill slope Rwhen the parking brake is released Rthe transmission is not in position i RESP® is functioning correctly. X Release the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about one sec- ond. X Pull away.

Automatic transmission j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear Please note i Neutral h Drive G WARNING When the engine is switched off, the auto- The ignition must be switched on in order to shift the transmission to positions , or matic transmission shifts into neutral j i k. To shift the transmission from position position N. The vehicle may roll away. j, you must also depress the brake pedal. There is a risk of an accident. X Press release knob :. Always shift to parking position P before X Shift the selector lever to the desired switching off the engine. Secure the parked transmission position. vehicle against rolling away by applying the parking brake. Maximum acceleration (kickdown) To reach maximum acceleration, use kick- Transmission position display down:

! Only shift into transmission positions X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the B, C or A when the vehicle is pressure point. stationary. Otherwise, you may damage X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the the transmission. desired speed is reached. Radar-based recuperation 65

Using the turn signals Deactivating/activating the acoustic presence indicator

The ignition must be switched on in order to use the turn signals. The acoustic presence indicator is automat- ically activated each time the ignition is X To indicate: press the combination switch started. >> Driving. in the direction of arrow 1 (right) or 2 (left) past the point of resistance. X Press the switch. If the acoustic presence indicator is deac- X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance. tivated, the LED on the switch lights The turn signal flashes three times. up.

Acoustic presence indicator Radar-based recuperation

Useful information Only for instrument cluster with colour dis- Vehicles with an electric motor generate play: much less driving noise than vehicles with The "Radar-based recuperation" function internal combustion engines. As a result, the adapts the vehicle's rate of recuperation to vehicle may not be heard by other road users current traffic conditions. It activates itself in certain situations. automatically as soon as the accelerator In order to allow your vehicle to be heard pedal is released. There are five levels up to when it is moving at slow speeds, a sound the maximum value for optimum recupera- generator installed in the vehicle produces a tion and distance to the vehicle ahead. The specific noise at speeds between 0 and maximum value can vary depending on the 30 km/h. This function is called the acoustic charge status of the battery and the battery presence indicator. This helps other road temperature. users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, Radar sensors measure the distance to and to hear your vehicle better. The acoustic the speed of a vehicle ahead. The shorter the presence indicator can also be heard in the distance to the vehicle ahead, the greater the vehicle interior. recuperation. When recuperation is high, the The volume of the acoustic presence indica- brake lamps also light up. The current level tor depends on the engine speed. The faster of recuperation is not shown in the power you accelerate, the louder the sound is. At display (Y page 67). speeds of over 30 km/h, the sound is switched Radar-based recuperation is not active in off. Above this speed, the driving noise nat- the following cases: urally created by the vehicle is typically Rthe radar sensor system is malfunctioning sufficient for the vehicle to be heard in good Rthe connection to the radar is interrupted time by other road users. RActive Brake Assist is deactivated RECO mode is switched on

Z 66 Driving economically

Rthe vehicle speed is too low Ruse the air conditioning and the electrical Rthe transmission is in position k or i consumers sparingly Radar-based recuperation is switched off Rhave maintenance work carried out at the when ECO mode is activated. specified service intervals On-board computer with colour display: the You can use ECO mode in order to save more energy. symbol in the display indicates the status of radar-based recuperation: ECO mode has the following characteristics: R Rreduced torque and significantly reduced lights up white: switched on, not power. This supports a particularly effi- active cient, steady driving style. The speed is R lights up green: switched on, active reduced to approx. 110 km/h. Rthe performance of the air-conditioning R is not displayed: Active Brake Assist and heating systems is reduced. is deactivated or the radar sensor is mal- functioning Rthe maximum available recuperation is activated. On-board computer with colour display: radar-based recuperation is switched on and Rthe vehicle accelerates more slowly. >> Driving. off in the on-board computer (Y page 106). Rthe "radar-based recuperation" function Observe the notes on safe driving is switched off. (Y page 54). To increase acceleration when in ECO mode, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. Driving economically Notes on economical driving In order to save energy, a part of the kinetic energy is recuperated and stored in the high-voltage battery. When the driver relea- ses the accelerator pedal, the vehicle decel- erates. In the following cases, the vehicle does not decelerate, or only decelerates to a limited extent, when the accelerator pedal is released: Switching ECO mode on and off Rthe gear lever is in position h and the vehicle is rolling backwards X Press button :. Rthe gear lever is in position k and the If the energy-saving function is activated, vehicle is rolling forwards the ECO display is shown in the on-board computer. On steep slopes, the vehicle may not be held at all or only be held to a limited degree. The energy-saving function is switched off when the ignition is restarted. In the following cases recuperation is restricted: Rthe high-voltage battery is full or too cold Rthe power electronics or engine has over- heated Recommendations for driving economically: Raccelerate moderately Robserve the power availability display (Y page 67) Rdrive with care Driving economically 67

Power and charge level display Rthere is insufficient power available from the high-voltage battery Useful information Rthere is a malfunction in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system If the drive system has been started, the nee- dle of power display : is in position "0". The READY indicator appears in the instrument cluster. A tone sounds. The vehicle is ready for driving.

Charge level display ! Do not hang any objects on the charge level gauge. This could cause the charge level gauge to be torn out of its anchorage point and be : Power display damaged. ; Charge level display >> Driving. Charge level display ; displays the charge Power display : and charge level display ; status of the high-voltage battery as a per- can be adjusted to the left or right. The centage. charge level display lights up when the vehicle is unlocked. The high-voltage battery has reached the reserve level in the following cases: Power display Rthe Battery Reserve Level message appears in the display ! Do not hang any objects on the power Rcharge level display ; is in the red area display. This could cause the dashboard clock to be i Charge the high-voltage battery when torn out of its anchorage point and be the charge falls below 20%. severely damaged. Power display : contains two areas: Understanding the eco score display in RArea to the right of 0 The current power that the high-voltage the on-board computer battery provides is shown here. 100% cor- Useful information responds to the peak performance of the high-voltage battery. The eco score display provides information RArea to the left of 0 on how to drive economically. The vehicle's level of recuperation in over- A higher percentage indicates a more eco- run mode and when braking is shown here. nomical driving style. The LED ring in power display : shows the The percentage of the eco score display is power output available. only calculated after a short distance. If the If the needle for power display : is in the ignition remains switched off for longer than "OFF" position, the vehicle is not ready to four hours, the eco score display will be reset. drive because: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe gear lever has not been moved to posi- tion i or j to start the drive system Rthe charging cable is still connected to the vehicle socket

Z 68 Driving economically

Monochrome display The following rating information and val- ues appear: RBar graphs for accelerate, anticipa‐ tory and shift RBar graphs for Speed and Anticipation RDistance covered RTotal eco score as a percentage

Saving the current trip

X Select Current trip > Save. X Select the category under which you want to save the trip. The percentage of the eco score display The values for the current trip will be increases when you: added to the category selected and the Raccelerate with moderation current trip will be reset. In the instrument >> Driving. Ravoid unnecessary acceleration and cluster, the trip computer values will be deceleration returned to "From reset". The values for the current trip will be added to the category selected and the Colour display current trip will be reset. In the instrument cluster, the values for the "From start" trip computer and eco score display will be reset.

Comparing the current trip with the saved trips from a category

The percentage in the eco score display is calculated using the following categories: RSpeed: the value increases when driving at low speeds. RAnticipation: the value increases when unnecessary acceleration and decelera- tion is avoided.

Using the eco score display in the smart Media-System : Last trip saved in this category ; Average value for the category Calling up the eco score menu = Best trip in the category

X Select Vehicle > eco score. X Select Current trip > W > Compare. X Select a category. Evaluating the current trip A comparison of the values for the current trip with the values of the selected cate- X Select Current trip . gory appears. Evaluation information and values are cal- X Select the comparison value :, ; or =. culated. The current trip is compared to the respec- tive comparison value from the category. Braking correctly 69

Resetting the current trip data X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips > W > Reset this category. X Select Current trip > Reset. X Select Yes. In the instrument cluster, the trip com- puter values will be returned to "From Braking correctly reset". Please note In the instrument cluster, the values for the "From start" trip computer and eco WARNING score display will be reset. G The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while Activating/deactivating eco score after a driving. This increases the braking dis- trip tance and could even cause the braking X To activate: select Current trip > W > system to fail. There is a risk of an acci- Show eco score after trip. dent. To deactivate: select Current trip > W > Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do

X >> Driving. Hide eco score after trip. not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while Displaying eco score for saved trips in a driving. category The vehicle decelerates as soon as you X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ release the accelerator pedal. This aids recu- red trips. peration as the motor is used as a generator X Select a category. and charges the high-voltage battery. eco score displays the comparison values. eco score contains the following compari- son values for each category: Braking on steep downhill gradients RSummary Observe the following rules when driving on RLast value downhill gradients: RAverage value Rdo not move the selector lever to position RBest value i For the category Last trip saved you can Rif recuperation is restricted, also brake at choose from various types of evaluations. intervals Types of evaluations: RSummary Braking on wet road surfaces RDetailed report There may be a delayed brake response when driving on wet roads, after driving through a Renaming a category car wash or after driving through deep water. At least one trip must be stored in the respec- X Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle tive category. in front. X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ X Brake more firmly. red trips > W > Rename this category.

Resetting the eco score of a category Braking on salt-treated roads At least one trip must be stored in the respec- When driving on salt-treated roads, a layer tive category. of salt may form on the brake discs and pads.

Z 70 Lane Keeping Assist

This increases the vehicle's braking dis- X Drive carefully and avoid sudden acceler- tance. ation, turning and braking on slippery road surfaces. X In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while pay- X Do not use cruise control. ing attention to the traffic conditions. X If the vehicle skids, take corrective steer- X Brake carefully at the end of the journey ing actions to counteract the movement. and when starting the next journey. X If the vehicle skids, shift the transmission X Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle to position i. in front. X Do not use the outside temperature display as a way to determine if conditions are icy. X Observe the road surface. Driving on wet roads

Aquaplaning Lane Keeping Assist Depending on driving style and tyre tread depths, aquaplaning can occur on the road. Please note >> Driving. Adapt your driving style as follows: WARNING Reduce the speed. G X Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly Brake carefully. X detect lane markings. X Avoid sudden steering movements. In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: X Avoid tyre ruts. Rissue an unnecessary warning Rnot issue a warning Fording There is a risk of an accident. ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in Always pay particular attention to the front or in the opposite direction create traffic situation and keep within the lane, waves. This may cause the maximum per- especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts missible water depth to be exceeded. you. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise dam- age the engine, the electronics or the G WARNING transmission. The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not Observe the following when driving through return the vehicle to the original lane. standing water: There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, apply the brakes or acceler- X Do not drive through water that is higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body. ate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane X Drive at walking pace. Keeping Assist alerts you. Lane Keeping Assist issues an acoustic and visual warning when a vehicle unintention- Winter driving ally leaves the lane. Lane Keeping Assist uses a camera which is X Before the start of winter, have the vehicle located on the windscreen behind the rear- checked at a qualified specialist work- view mirror. shop. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi- X Use winter tyres and, if applicable, snow cle in its lane. The driver is responsible for chains. driving the vehicle in a safe manner and staying within the lane. Cruise control and limiter 71

Lane Keeping Assist could be impaired or fail Activating and deactivating Lane to respond under the following conditions: Keeping Assist Rpoor visibility Rstrong glaring light Rdirty windscreen in the camera area Runclear or broken lane markings Rvery narrow and winding roads Rhighly variable shade conditions on the road When the turn signal is set, warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. No warning is given in the following situa- tions: Rwhen crossing a lane marking quickly X Press the switch. Rat speeds below 70 km/h When Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated, On-board computer with monochrome dis- >> Driving. the LED on the switch lights up. play: the ¸ and ¤ symbols in the dis- play indicate the status of Lane Keeping On-board computer with colour display: Assist: the display also shows a message. R¸: speed is below 70 km/h or lanes are When the ignition is restarted, the last set- not detected due to external causes. No ting of Lane Keeping Assist is retained. warning is given when the vehicle leaves the lane. R¤: speed is above 70 km/h and the sys- Cruise control and limiter tem is able to detect lane markings. A warning is given if the vehicle uninten- Please note tionally leaves the detected lane. WARNING On-board computer with colour display: The G ¸ symbol in the display indicates the If you call up the stored speed and this status of Lane Keeping Assist: differs from your current speed, the vehi- R¸ lights up white: speed is below cle will accelerate. If you do not know the 70 km/h or lanes are not detected due to stored speed, the vehicle can accelerate external causes. No warning is given when unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- the vehicle leaves the lane. dent. R¸ lights up green: speed is above Before you call up the stored speed, pay 70 km/h and the system is able to detect attention to traffic conditions. If you do not lane markings. A warning is given if the vehicle unintentionally leaves the detec- know the stored speed, store the desired ted lane. speed again. Cruise control is used in order to drive at a constant speed for a prolonged period. The limiter helps to avoid exceeding a stored speed. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle in a safe manner, controlling the vehicle speed and braking in good time. If there is a change of drivers, inform the new driver of the speed stored.

Z 72 Charging the high-voltage battery

The two driver assist systems require the Storing the current speed following: Press ® button ;. Rfavourable weather and good visibility X Limiter: the stored speed appears next to Rgood road and traffic conditions the È symbol in the instrument cluster The cruise control and limiter systems do not display. brake automatically. Cruise control: the stored speed appears Rreduce the vehicle speed by applying the next to the ¯ symbol in the instrument brakes cluster display. Speed regulation is cancelled when the fol- lowing occur: Rbraking (including the parking brake) Adjusting the stored speed R ® ESP intervention X Press ® button ; or g until the On downhill gradients or when accelerating desired speed is reached. briefly, cruise control may interrupt speed regulation. Afterwards, the set speed is

>> Driving. applied again. Interrupting cruise control and the On downhill slopes, the limiter can exceed the set speed. In this case, the stored speed limiter flashes in the display and a warning tone X Press ± button ?. sounds. The stored speed can be accessed again Cruise control is ready for use at speeds later. above 30 km/h. With the limiter, speeds of The stored speed is deleted when the engine 30 km/h and over can be set as the maximum is switched off. speed. Cruise control and limiter cannot be activa- ted at the same time. Calling up the stored speed

X Press ° button =. Activating cruise control or the limiter X Cruise control: release the accelerator pedal.

Deactivating cruise control or the lim- iter

X Press button : to the OFF centre position. The ¯ or È symbol in the instrument cluster display goes out. The stored speed is deleted. The stored speed is deleted when the engine is switched off. X Press top (cruise control) or bottom (lim- iter) of button :. The ¯ (cruise control) or È (limiter) Charging the high-voltage battery button appears in the instrument cluster display. Please note

G DANGER The vehicle's high voltage electrical sys- tem is under high voltage. If you modify Charging the high-voltage battery 73 components in the vehicle's high-voltage To avoid such risks, observe the following: electrical system or touch damaged com- Rdo not tamper with high-voltage com- ponents, you may be electrocuted. The ponents or the orange cables of the vehi- components in the vehicle's high-voltage cle's high-voltage electrical system electrical system may be damaged in an Rnever touch the high-voltage compo- accident, although the damage is not visi- nents or the orange cables of the high- ble. There is a risk of fatal injury. voltage electrical system in a vehicle Do not touch any high-voltage components which has been involved in an accident after an accident and never modify the Rnever touch any damaged components or vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. the damaged orange cables of the vehi- Have the vehicle towed away after an acci- cle's high-voltage electrical system dent and the vehicle's high-voltage elec- trical system checked by a qualified spe- Rdo not remove the covers of the high- cialist workshop. voltage electrical system components that are marked with a yellow warning

sticker >> Driving. G WARNING In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal Rdo not insert any objects which conduct pressure of the high-voltage battery could electricity into the charging cable con- exceed a critical value. In this case, flam- nector or the charging cable socket mable gas escapes through a vent valve in the vehicle's underbody. The gas could G DANGER ignite. There is a risk of injury. The vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys- In cases of unusual smells developing, tem is under high voltage. If the charging smoke or burn marks, stop the charging process is not performed properly, it could process immediately. cause a fire or an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. Leave the danger area immediately. Secure the danger area at a suitable distance. Do not perform the charging process in the following situations: Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Rat temperatures of over 50 † and below G WARNING -40 † If the housing of the high-voltage battery Rin storms has been damaged, electrolyte and gases Rif the charging cable is damaged, rusted may leak out. These are poisonous and or corroded caustic. There is a risk of injury. Rif there is moisture on the charging cable Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth- connector or charging cable socket, or ing. Immediately rinse electrolyte your hands are wet splashes off with water and seek medical Rwhen cleaning the vehicle attention straight away. To avoid hazardous situations, always han- G DANGER dle the charging cable correctly before and The vehicle's high-voltage electrical sys- after using it: tem is under high voltage. If you carry out Rbefore using the charging cable for the work on high-voltage components, you first time, remove the adhesive tape which holds the cable together may suffer an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. Runwind the charging cable fully before every charging process

Z 74 Charging the high-voltage battery

Rthere must be no foreign objects in the In addition to recuperation, the high-voltage charging cable connector or on the charg- battery can be charged as follows: ing cable socket Rwith the suitable charging cable at a mains Rkeep the charging cable out of the reach of socket while the vehicle is stationary children and animals. Always store the Rwith the suitable charging cable at a wall- charging cable in a safe place, e.g. in the box while the vehicle is stationary charging cable bag Rwith the suitable charging cable at a The high-voltage battery must not be charging station while the vehicle is sta- charged with a damaged charging cable. tionary Therefore, always make sure that: Ryou do not damage the charging cable, e.g. by driving over it, pulling too hard or as a result of heavy impacts Rthe charging cable is not twisted, as oth- erwise the charging cable may overheat and the cable covering may be damaged

>> Driving. Rthe charging cable is not placed in water, fluids or snow The charging cable must always be used in the correct manner. In order to ensure the charging cable is handled correctly, observe the following: : Charging cable for charging at a charging Rdo not make any changes or modifications station or wallbox to the charging cable ; Charging cable for charging at a mains Ronly use the charging cable to charge the socket high-voltage battery Charging cables may differ from the versions Rdo not pull out the charging cable connec- shown depending on the country. tor or the charging cable socket during the The different versions of charging cables are charging process distinguished by their charging cable con- For safety reasons, only use the charging nectors. Charging cables which are charged cable which is supplied with the vehicle or at a mains socket also have controls. has been approved by smart for this vehicle. The options listed for charging a high-volt- age battery are not available in all countries. The high-voltage battery can be charged at a Useful information charging station or wallbox in a nominal voltage range from 100 V to 400 V. Method of operation Vehicles with 22 kW on-board charger: the The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage high-voltage battery can be charged in a battery for driving. The high-voltage bat- nominal voltage range from 220 V to 400 V. tery stores the energy needed to operate the i If possible only charge the high-voltage electric motor and releases it again. battery when the charge is below 80%. The electric motor uses energy stored in the Charge the high-voltage battery at the high-voltage battery for pulling away and latest when the charge falls below 20%. accelerating. In overrun mode, kinetic energy is converted Discharged high-voltage battery into electrical energy by recuperation and stored in the high-voltage battery. The high-voltage electrical system switches off if the high-voltage battery is completely discharged. This protects the high-voltage battery from exhaustive discharge. Charging the high-voltage battery 75 i Switching the ignition on and then off Battery care can reactivate the high-voltage electrical system temporarily. The vehicle can then Observe the following notes on battery care: be parked safely. Ravoid storing or transporting the vehicle Do not leave the vehicle with a discharged or in high temperatures over a long period almost fully discharged high-voltage bat- (e.g. container transport). tery for longer than 14 days. You can check Rconnect the vehicle to a power supply the charge status in the charge level display when parking it for an extended period of (Y page 67). time. RTemperatures below Ò25 † for more than Extreme outside temperatures seven days can cause irreversible damage to the vehicle due to frost damage. The efficiency of the high-voltage battery is temperature-dependent and is significantly Terms of use reduced at low or high temperatures. In addi- tion, the electrolytes used may freeze at very Observe the information on exceptions and low temperatures. limitations in the warranty documentation The LED ring in the power output display and in the Service Booklet. >> Driving. shows the power output available (Y page 67). Voltage surge protector Energy consumption and range ! Overvoltage in the mains supply can damage the vehicle. The vehicle is there- The available energy in the high-voltage fore equipped with a device which protects battery is basically reduced by the following it from overvoltage in the mains supply. factors: This device may be triggered during severe thunderstorms, for example, and Rlow outside temperatures may lead to the building's circuit breaker Roperating the air-conditioning system or being tripped and an interruption in the heating power supply. These functions protect the Ruse of electrical consumers vehicle. After the building's circuit Leaving the vehicle parked for an extended breaker is switched on again, the charging period at low outdoor temperatures without process resumes automatically. Following charging it can lead to the following: an interruption in the power supply with- out the building's circuit breaker being Rhigh-voltage battery output is signifi- cantly reduced tripped, it may take up to ten minutes for charging to resume automatically. Rcharge times can be longer After the device has triggered, switch the Rrange can be significantly reduced building's fuse unit on again. Otherwise, the In extreme cases, it may not be possible to charging process will not resume. start the vehicle as a result. You should therefore always ensure that the high-volt- age battery is fully charged or that the Heat generated by the charging cable charging cable is connected when parking and charging cable connector the vehicle for an extended period of time at Charging cables and charging cable connec- low outside temperatures. tors may heat up during the charging proc- As the high-voltage battery ages, the capa- ess at a power socket. city of the high-voltage battery will dimin- ish over the battery's lifetime. This means that the maximum range and the maximum acceleration are reduced.

Z 76 Charging the high-voltage battery

In the following cases, the degree of heating RNever use socket adapters to connect the is within the permissible limits: charging cable to the mains socket. The Rthe mains supply and charging cable only exception being if the adapter has infrastructure are intact been tested and approved by the manu- Rthe instructions for handling the charging facturer for charging the high-voltage cable and control panel of the charging battery of an electric vehicle. cable are observed If heating up beyond the permissible limits RObserve the safety notes in the operat- occurs, have the mains supply infrastructure ing instructions for the socket adapter. checked.

Disposing of a charging cable Do not dispose of a charging cable with household rubbish, give it to a suitable recy- cling service. Abide by the potential legal requirements for recycling. >> Driving.

Understanding the vehicle socket Vehicle socket overview

G DANGER Connecting the charging cable to the mains supply via incorrectly installed mains sockets or by means of adapters, extension cables or similar could cause a : Charge socket flap fire or an electric shock. There is a risk of ; Socket cap fatal injury. = Locking mechanism To avoid hazardous situations, observe the ? Indicator lamp following: A Vehicle socket ROnly connect the charging cable to mains sockets: Indicator lamp on the vehicle socket - which have been properly installed When the indicator lamp on the vehicle and socket lights up, this means the following: - which have been inspected by a quali- Indicator lamp fied electrician Flashes High-voltage battery is RFor safety reasons, only use the charg- green slowly charging. ing cables supplied with the vehicle, or charging cables which have been Lights up High-voltage battery is green fully charged. approved for use with this vehicle. RNever use a damaged charging cable. Flashes Vehicle waiting for charg- orange ing to start. RDo not use: slowly - extension cables - extension reels - multiple sockets Charging the high-voltage battery 77

Indicator lamp To avoid such risks, observe the following: Flashes Vehicle is paused from ROnly connect the charging cable to a orange charging. wallbox: Flashes red A malfunction occurred - which has been properly installed and quickly during charging. - has been inspected by a qualified electrician RFor safety reasons, only use charging Charging the battery at a charging sta- cables which have been tested and tion or wall box approved for charging the high-voltage battery of an electric vehicle. Charging stations without communica- tions functionality RNever use damaged charging cables. RDo not connect the charging cable to an Charging stations without communications amplifier. functionality must be activated before RDo not extend the charging cable. charging, e.g. by using an RFID card. Observe >> Driving. the notes provided by the charging station RNever use an adapter. operator. RObserve the safety notes in the operat- ing instructions for the wallbox. Charging stations with communication capabilities (Plug&Charge) The "Plug&Charge" function is not available in all countries. A suitable electricity contract is required in order to use "Plug&Charge". To arrange this, contact the charging station operator. If the vehicle is connected to a charging sta- tion with communication capabilities, infor- mation and technical parameters are exchanged so that the charging process can be started without additional activation. This function is called "Plug&Charge". Due to the data transfer, it may take up to 30 seconds after the charging cable is con- nected before charging begins. i International Standard ISO 15118 is used for the communication between the vehicle and the intelligent charging station. : Charge socket flap ; Socket cap Connecting a charging cable = Locking mechanism ? Indicator lamp G DANGER A Vehicle socket Connecting the charging cable to the wall- X Wallbox without a pre-installed cable or box via an incorrectly installed wallbox or charging station: before using the charg- by means of adapters, extension cables or ing cable for the first time, remove the similar could cause a fire or an electric adhesive tape, which holds the cable together. shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. X Fully unwind the charging cable before charging.

Z 78 Charging the high-voltage battery

X Engage transmission position j. X Close charge socket flap :. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition X Wallbox without a pre-mounted cable or lock and remove it. charging station: if necessary, disconnect the charging cable from the wallbox and X Open socket flap : ( page 76). Y stow it in the charging cable bag Release locking mechanism on socket X = ( page 81). cap ;. Y Socket cap ; opens. X Wallbox without a preinstalled cable: insert the charging cable connector into Understanding the charging cable for the wallbox socket to the stop. mains sockets X Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket A to the stop. Useful information The vehicle socket locks audibly. ! Only use the charging cable to charge the The high-voltage battery is charged and high-voltage battery. Do not use the indicator lamp ? on the vehicle socket charging cable for other purposes. It may slowly flashes green. otherwise be damaged. >> Driving. i The high-voltage battery is fully Depending on the vehicle version, the vehicle charged when indicator lamp ? on the is equipped with different charging cable vehicle socket lights up green. versions. Charging cable versions differ in i The vehicle must not be moved during their controls. charging. The gear lever cannot be shifted i If you use the mains socket to charge the from position j. high-voltage battery, the charging time is i Depending on the temperature, the longer and the electricity consumption is engine cooling system and battery cooling higher. If possible, charge the high-volt- system may audibly switch on during the age battery at a wallbox or a charging sta- charging process. tion. Only use a charging cable which is approved Removing the charging cable by smart for this vehicle. Do not leave the charging cable control panel The charging cable may be removed when the hanging loose from a mains socket. Other- charging process has completed or has been wise, this could lead to a bad contact with the cancelled. mains socket and to malfunctions when ! Always disconnect the charging cable charging the vehicle. from the vehicle socket first. Disconnect- Never lift or carry the control panel by the ing the charging cable from the stationary charging cable connector or the mains plug. socket first could damage the charging Only for charging cable version 1: before cable connector. charging at a mains socket, check the maxi- mum permissible charge current for the cor- Press the % button on the key. X responding mains socket or building. The Indicator lamp above vehicle socket ? A maximum value of the charge current is set to goes out. the country-specific setting for the supplied Vehicle socket A unlocks audibly. charging cable. When charging abroad, the X Disconnect the charging cable within maximum value may exceed that of the coun- 60 seconds from vehicle socket A. Other- try you are in. Observe the regulations spe- wise, the vehicle will relock the vehicle cific to the country you are in if charging socket. abroad. Consult a qualified specialist work- The connector locking mechanism on the shop if you have questions about charge cur- charging station is opened. rent settings or a malfunction. X Close socket cap ;. Charging the high-voltage battery 79

Controls of charging cable version one Indicator lamp ? Flashes red An internal malfunction quickly has occurred. The high- voltage battery cannot be charged. The infrastructure has a malfunction. The high- voltage battery cannot be charged.

If the control element detects a fault current or a malfunction, the charging process is : Voltage indicator lamp interrupted. The charging process will be resumed automatically when the malfunc- Charging process indicator lamp ; tion has been rectified. = Indicator lamp temperature monitor ? Electrical fuse and control system indi- >> Driving. cator lamp Controls of charging cable version two The indicator lamps on the charging cable indicate the following: Indicator lamp : Lights up Voltage is switched on. The white high-voltage battery can be charged.

Indicator lamp ; Flashes High-voltage battery is green charging. : Indicator lamp for charge current setting ; Voltage indicator lamp Charging process indicator lamp Indicator lamp = = ? Electrical fuse and control system indi- Lights up With flashing green indica- cator lamp red tor lamp ;: the charge out- A Button for setting the charge current put is reduced due to over- temperature. The indicator lamps on the charging cable indicate the following: Without flashing green indicator lamp ;: charg- Indicator lamp : ing was terminated due to overtemperature on the Lights up Value is set as the desired charging cable. green charging current. Flashes red Charging was terminated Flashes Depending on the mains due to overtemperature on orange socket, the value cannot be the mains socket. set as the desired charging current.

Z 80 Charging the high-voltage battery

charging cable version 2. This may protect Indicator lamp ; the mains supply from overloads. Lights up Voltage is switched on. The The maximum setting value and the adjust- green high-voltage battery can ment values may vary from country to coun- be charged. try. The preset default value is the minimum set- ting. This is the minimum charge current Indicator lamp = available from the mains supply. Lights up High-voltage battery is If the charging cable is left connected to the green charging. mains socket, the currently selected values will be used for the next charging process. If Flashes Connection to vehicle has the charging cable is removed from the orange been made. mains socket, the values will be reset to the minimum setting for the next charging proc- ess. Indicator lamp ? X Check the maximum permissible charge current for the relevant mains socket.

>> Driving. Lights up The current at the control red panel is not correct. The X Insert the mains plug into the mains high-voltage battery can- socket. not be charged. You have one minute to set the charge cur- rent. For transportation, wrap the charging cable X Press button A repeatedly until the indi- around the control panel or secure it to the cator lamp in the desired setting lights up control panel housing. green. The desired value has been set. Setting the charging current (only i After one minute, the charge current can charging cable version two) only be set by restarting. To do so, remove the charging cable from the mains supply G WARNING and reinsert it into the mains socket. If the charge current draw via a mains socket is too high during the charging process, the external mains supply may overheat. There is a risk of fire. Before charging, check the maximum per- missible charge current available at the location. If necessary, contact a qualified specialist company for assistance. Adjust your vehicle's settings, if neces- sary.

! If the charge current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the external mains supply could overheat. Check if the exter- nal mains supply is equipped to handle the programmed charge current. If necessary, reduce the programmed charge current or use a different mains socket. You can only limit the charging current for charging the high-voltage battery with Charging the high-voltage battery 81

Charging the battery using a mains i The vehicle must not be moved during socket charging. The gear lever cannot be shifted from position j. Connecting a charging cable i Depending on the temperature, the engine cooling system and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process. i Only for charging cable version 2: if charging the vehicle's high-voltage bat- tery is taking longer than usual, check the maximum charge current settings.

Removing the charging cable ! Always disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle socket first. Disconnect-

ing the charging cable from the stationary >> Driving. socket first could damage the charging cable connector. The charging cable can be removed when the high-voltage battery is completely charged or charging has to be interrupted. : Charge socket flap ; Socket cap X Press the % button on the key. Indicator lamp above vehicle socket = Locking mechanism ? A goes out. Vehicle socket A unlocks audi- ? Indicator lamp bly. A Vehicle socket X Disconnect the charging cable within X Fully unwind the charging cable before 60 seconds from vehicle socket A. Other- charging. wise, the vehicle will relock the vehicle X Engage transmission position j. socket. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition X Close socket cap ;. lock and remove it. X Close charge socket flap :. X Open socket flap : (Y page 76). X Remove the charging cable from the mains socket. X Release locking mechanism = on socket cap ;. X Stow the charging cable safely in the Socket cap ; opens. charging cable bag (Y page 81). X Insert the mains plug into the mains socket to the stop. X Only for charging cable version 2: set the Storing the charging cable desired charge current. Insert the charging cable connector into ! The charging cable must be stowed in the X charging cable bag only to prevent it from vehicle socket A to the stop. The vehicle socket locks audibly. being thrown around inside the vehicle. The high-voltage battery is charged and X Stow the charging cable in the charging indicator lamp ? on the vehicle socket cable bag. slowly flashes green. The charging cable bag is located in the boot i The high-voltage battery is fully (Y page 148). charged when indicator lamp ? on the vehicle socket lights up green perma- nently.

Z 82 Switching on the lighting

Switching on the lighting X Turn combination switch control : to the à position. Useful information When one or more of the following occurs, the The driver must ensure that the light set- lights are switched off automatically: tings match the current weather, light and RThe engine is switched off. traffic conditions. RThe driver's door is opened. For reasons of safety, smart recommends that RThe vehicle is locked. you drive with the daytime driving lights or dipped-beam headlamps switched on even RThe main-beam headlamps are not during the daytime. switched on when the vehicle is station- ary. A warning tone sounds if the lights are still on when you leave the vehicle. In some countries, operation of the head- lamps varies due to legal requirements and Switching on the dipped-beam head- self-imposed obligations. lamps X Turn combination switch control : to the L position. The L indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Switching the main-beam headlamps on or off

: Combination switch control >> Ensuring good visibility. ; Marking

Activating automatic headlamp mode

G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be The engine must be running. switched on automatically if there is fog, Turn the combination switch control to the snow or other causes of poor visibility due X Ã or K position. to the weather conditions such as spray. To switch on: press the combination switch There is a risk of an accident. X in the direction of arrow 1. In such situations, turn the light switch to X To switch off: move the combination switch L. back to its original position.

While the engine is running, the light setting The K indicator lamp in the instrument is selected automatically according to the cluster lights up when the main-beam head- lamps are switched on. brightness of the ambient light. Ã con- trols the daytime driving lights, side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. Adjusting the lighting 83

Using the headlamp flasher Using the cornering light function

X Pull the combination switch in the direc- Only vehicles with the LED & Sensor package tion of arrow 2. are equipped with the cornering light func- tion. The cornering light function uses the front Switching on the side lamps foglamps to improve the illumination of the road in the direction in which you are turn- X Turn combination switch control : to the ing, enabling better visibility in tight bends, T position. for example. The following conditions must be fulfilled for the cornering light function to switch on Switching the foglamps and rear fog- automatically: lamp on and off Rthe dipped-beam headlamps are switched on Only vehicles with front foglamps have the Rthe vehicle is moving at less than "Foglamps" function. 40 km/h Rthe turn signal is switched on or the steer- ing wheel is turned

Adjusting the lighting Adjusting the headlamp range The vehicle load can affect the headlamp range. This can impair visibility, and the headlamps can dazzle oncoming traffic.

: Combination switch middle ring >> Ensuring good visibility. ; Marking Switch on the ignition and either the side lamps or the dipped beam headlamps in order to switch on the fog lamps. Start the engine and switch on either the side lamps or dipped beam headlamps in order to switch on the rear foglamp. X To switch on or off manually: turn combi- nation switch middle ring : to the desired marking: The ignition must be switched on in order to RO Foglamps set the headlamp range. R R Rear foglamp X Turn headlamp range adjuster : to the After releasing, the combination switch mid- position which corresponds to the load in dle ring returns automatically to the neutral your vehicle. position. Positions for the vehicle load: The foglamps and rear foglamp also switch Rg: Driver's seat occupied or driver's seat off automatically in the following situations: and front-passenger seat occupied Rthe lights are switched off. R1: Other loading Rthe engine is switched off and the control is in the à position.

Z 84 Using the windscreen wipers

Adjusting the dipped-beam headlamps The interior lighting can be activated when a to left-hand or right-hand traffic door is open. After closing the doors, the interior lighting goes out. The symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps are required when travelling in countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to that in which the vehicle is registered. Unlike the asymmetrical dipped- beam headlamps, these headlamps do not dazzle oncoming traffic. Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps provide less illu- mination to the edge of the carriageway.

X Press switch : to switch the left-hand reading lamp on and off. X Move switch ; to the desired position: RInterior lighting switched on. RInterior lighting controlled automati- cally. RInterior lighting switched off. X Press switch = to switch the right-hand X Open the service cover. reading lamp on and off. X For symmetrical dipped beam: turn the screws of both headlamps as far as they will go to position ±. Adjusting the ambient lighting (colour For asymmetrical dipped beam: turn the >> Ensuring good visibility. display) screws of both headlamps as far as they will go to position q. On-board computer with colour display: the ambient lighting is set in the on-board com- X Have the dipped-beam headlamp setting checked at a qualified specialist work- puter (Y page 106). shop.

Using the windscreen wipers Using the interior lighting Switching on the windscreen wipers Switching the interior lighting on and Please note off Do not operate the windscreen wipers The interior lights go on when you unlock the ! when the windscreen is dry, as this could doors. damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust The interior lights switch off in the following that has collected on the windscreen can situations: scratch the glass if wiping takes place RA door is opened and 15 minutes have when the windscreen is dry. passed. If it is necessary to switch on the wind- RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has been screen wipers in dry weather conditions, locked and 15 seconds have passed. always operate them using washer fluid. RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has not ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- been locked and 4 minutes have passed. screen becomes dirty in dry weather con- RThe engine has been started. ditions, the windscreen wipers may be Using the windscreen wipers 85

activated inadvertently. This could dam- Switching on intermittent wiping age the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. X Press the combination switch to the © For this reason, you should always switch position. off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. X Use control : to set the wipe frequency. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are free of ice. Otherwise the wiper motor may Wiping with washer fluid overheat. X Pull the combination switch in the direc- Wiper blades are subject to wear and tear. tion of arrow î. smart recommends replacing the wiper blades twice a year. Worn or damaged wiper blades cause smearing on the windscreen. On vehicles with a rain sensor, malfunctions are Switching the rear window wiper on then possible. and off (smart fortwo coupé)

Switching continuous wipe on and off

To operate the rear window wiper, the igni- tion must be switched on. >> Ensuring good visibility. : Control for wipe frequency X Turn the outer control on the combination g Continuous wipe, off switch to the desired position: © Automatic wipe Rg Rear window wiper off 1 Continuous wipe, slow Rè Rear window wiper on 2 Continuous wipe, fast Rî Wipes with washer fluid î Wiping with washer fluid The ignition must be switched on in order to operate the windscreen wipers. Switching the rear window wiper on X Press the combination switch down or up and off when in reverse gear (smart to the desired position. fortwo coupé) You can switch the "Automatic rear window Automatic wipe (vehicles with rain sen- wiper when reversing" setting on or off in the sor) smart Media-System. The rear window wiper is automatically activated for a short while The rain sensor is only an aid. The driver is when the ignition is switched on, the window responsible for ensuring good visibility at wipers are switched on and reverse gear is all times. engaged. X Press the combination switch to the © X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle position. In automatic wipe mode, the > Settings > Auto rear wipe with appropriate wiping frequency is set reverse gear. according to the intensity of the rain. The selected setting is highlighted. X Use control : to set the wipe frequency. X Confirm the setting with Done.

Z 86 Folding the sun visor to the side

Folding the sun visor to the side

: Mirror cover ; Bracket = Retaining strap ? Vanity mirror

X Fold the sun visor down. X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Fold the sun visor to one side >> Ensuring good visibility. Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside 87

Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside Using the door handle to unlock the door

X To lock: press button :. When the doors are locked, indicator lamp ; lights up. X To unlock: press button :.

X Pull door handle :. If the vehicle has previously been locked Activating and deactivating the auto- with the key, opening a door from the inside matic locking feature will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To The activated automatic locking feature disable the alarm, switch on the ignition. locks the vehicle automatically when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle is moving. Centrally locking and unlocking the X When the engine is running, press and vehicle from the inside hold button : for 5 seconds until a tone sounds. G WARNING Repeat the procedure to deactivate the If children are left unsupervised in the automatic locking feature. vehicle, they can: When the automatic locking function is activated, the locking mechanism engages Ropen doors and endanger other persons audibly when you pull away. When the or road users automatic locking function is deactivated, Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic no sound occurs. Roperate vehicle equipment and, for example, trap themselves. Children could also set the vehicle in Activating the double-lock function motion, for example by: For United Kingdom only: the double-lock function prevents the doors from being Rreleasing the parking brake

opened from the inside. >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the Rstarting the engine. doors can no longer be opened from the There is a risk of an accident and injury. inside. People in the vehicle can no longer When leaving the vehicle, always take the get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There key with you and lock the vehicle. Never is a risk of injury. leave children unattended in the vehicle. Therefore, do not leave any people unsu- Always keep the key out of reach of chil- pervised in the vehicle, particularly chil- dren.

Z 88 Opening and closing the windows

dren, elderly people or people in need of Opening and closing the windows special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. Please note G WARNING WARNING G While closing the side windows, body parts If persons (particularly children) are in the closing area could become trapped. exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged There is a risk of injury. period, there is a risk of serious or even When closing make sure that no parts of fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- the body are in the closing area. If some- ticularly children) unattended in the vehi- body becomes trapped, release the switch cle. or press the switch to open the side window again. X Press button : twice. The double-lock function is enabled. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they Understanding the reversing feature operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. Vehicles with automatic operation: the side When leaving the vehicle, always take the windows are equipped with an automatic key with you and lock the vehicle. Never reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or leave children unattended in the vehicle. restricts a side window from closing during automatic operation, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual G WARNING closing process, the side window only opens If you close a side window again immedi- again automatically after the corresponding ately after it has been blocked or reset, the switch is released. The automatic reversing side window closes with increased or max- feature is only an aid. The driver is respon- sible for operating the side windows safely. imum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trap- G WARNING ped in the closing area in the process. This The reversing feature does not react: poses an increased risk of injury or even Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fatal injury. fingers Make sure that no parts of the body are in Rwhile adjusting the closing area. To stop the closing proc- ess, release the switch or push the switch This means that the reversing feature can- again to reopen the side window. not prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Vehicles with automatic operation: the switches for both side windows are located

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone on the driver's door. There is also a switch for becomes trapped, press the W button to the front-passenger window on the front- passenger door. The switch on the driver’s open the side window again. door takes precedence. Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) 89

Opening and closing the windows Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) Please note

G WARNING During opening and closing of the folding top or rear soft top, body parts may become trapped for example, by the roof mechan- ical system. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that no parts of the body are in the immediate vicinity of moving parts during the closing or opening process. Release the switch immediately if somebody becomes Vehicles with automatic operation trapped. : Left side window ; Right side window ! When transporting long objects in the vehicle interior, make sure that these do not press against the folding roof when it is closed. When transporting objects that extend beyond the rear, make sure that these do not rest on the rear soft top fasteners (brackets). During loading, make sure that objects with sharp edges do not come into contact with the soft top or the rear win- dow. If the rear soft top is lowered, do not dis- tribute a weight in excess of 75 kg on top of Vehicles without automatic operation it. To open: press the switch. Make sure that the third brake lamp is not X covered. X To close: pull the switch. ! Make sure that the lock openings of the soft-top system are not blocked. Stow the side spars only in the intended stowage Opening and closing windows fully in compartment in the tailgate. automatic mode ! Make sure that objects in the luggage Vehicles with automatic operation: compartment are not stacked too high. X To open the windows fully, press the They could otherwise be damaged when switch beyond the point of resistance and the rear soft top is opened or closed. release it. The procedure for removing, fitting and >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. X To close the windows fully, pull the switch stowing the side bars is described below. The beyond the point of resistance and release QR code is a link to a video clip that demon- it. strates the procedure. X To stop automatic operation, press the switch again.

Z 90 Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio)

Opening and closing the soft top X To release: slide lever : back. The side bar is unlocked. X Push lever : back again and remove side bars ;.

Stowing the side bars

G WARNING If you transport the side bars without securing them, they may be thrown around in the event of an accident, braking or sud- den changes in direction. There is a risk of To open or close the soft top, the ignition injury. must be switched on. Always stow the side bars in the designa- X To open: press the switch to position ; ted stowage well and close the stowage until the soft top is in the desired position. well lid. Press switch ; again to fully open the soft top. ! When the rear soft top is lowered, the side X To close: press the switch to position : support beams could be stolen. Therefore, until the soft top is in the desired position. remove the side support beams and stow It is possible to open or close the soft top them in the luggage compartment or close while driving up to the maximum design the soft top. speed. In poor weather and at high speeds, it ! If you load the stowage space it could be is possible that electric locking when closing damaged. is not reliable. If this is the case you must reduce the speed and, if necessary, press the Never stow heavy objects on the stowage switch again to close the soft top. space or sit on it. Please note: Ronly use the stowage space to store the Opening the soft top (using the key) side bars Ralways place both side bars in the stowage X Press and hold the é button on the key. space

Removing the side bars

X Open the soft top. X Open the doors and tailgate. >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Observe the notice on the stowage space. X Release fastening straps : on the stowage space and guide the locking mechanism Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) 91

with your hand until the fastening straps X Close the cover. are released. The cover must audibly engage. X Open cover ;. X Secure both fastening straps with ten- X Store the side bars as shown (observe sioner : on rear detent ;. markings l and k on the side bars and The red surfaces at the side must no longer the stowage compartment for the left and be visible. An audible click can be heard right side bars): upon engaging. X Close the tailgate. X If the tailgate does not close properly, check if the side bars have been stored as specified.

Fitting the side bars

G WARNING If the side bars are incorrectly mounted they may become loose during the journey and endanger other road users. There is a risk of accident and injury. Mount the side bars as described.

X Open the doors and tailgate. X Release the fastening straps on the stow- age space and guide the locking mecha- nism with your hand until the fastening straps are released. X Open the cover. X Remove the side bars.

: Side bar, front left ; Side bar, rear left = Side bar, front right ? Side bar, rear right >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

X Insert the side bar from the stowage com- partment marked L on the left side at the front end :. X Press down rear end of side bar ; until it engages twice. X Fit the side bar from the stowage compart- ment marked R on the right-hand side.

Z 92 Operating the climate control system

Closing the stowage space without the Fitting and removing the draught stop side bars (smart fortwo cabrio) Fitting the draught stop

X Move folding mechanism : in the direc- tion of the arrow. X Close cover ;.

X Open the soft top completely. X Attach recesses : of draught stop = on to hooks ; on the roll bar. X Attach loops A on to hooks ? in the side panelling.

Removing the draught stop X Secure both fastening straps with ten- sioner : on front detent ;. X Unhook loops A from hooks ? in the side The red surfaces at the side must no longer panelling. be visible. An audible click can be heard X Unhook recesses : from hooks ; on the upon engaging. roll bar. X Close the tailgate.

Operating the climate control system Useful information

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. The climate control system is only available when the ignition is switched on. If the climate control system is deactivated, the air supply and circulation are switched off. The windows could mist up. You should therefore switch off the climate control sys- tem for brief periods only. In air-recirculation mode, only the air inside the vehicle is recirculated and no fresh air is introduced. This is useful in a tunnel or when there are unpleasant odours outside the Operating the climate control system 93 vehicle. In air-recirculation mode, the win- tribution and blower speed are regulated dows may mist up more quickly, particularly automatically. when the outside temperature is low. There- fore, switch on air-recirculation mode only Setting and switching the air distribu- briefly. tion off smart fortwo cabrio: when the soft top is open, the climate control system is always X Press one or more of the ¯, P, O deactivated. When the temperature is set to buttons. maximum cooling, the climate control system R¯ Demister vents remains activated. RP Centre and side air vents The integrated filter in the climate control RO Footwell vents system keeps out most particles of dust as well as pollen. The filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this Increasing the blower speed reason, always observe the interval for replacing the filter. X Press the K button.

Decreasing the blower speed Operating the automatic climate con- trol system X Press the I button. Switching the automatic climate control Activating/deactivating air-recircula- system on and off tion mode

X Press the À button. The indicator lamp above À lights up when air-recirculation mode is activated.

Switching "Cooling with air dehumidifi- cation" on or off The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cools and dehumidifies the air inside the vehicle during warm weather. The engine must be running in order to use "Cooling with air dehumidification". The ignition must be switched on in order to To switch on: press the K and operate the blower. The engine must be run- X ¿ button. ning in order to operate all the functions of the automatic climate control system. The indicator lamp below ¿ lights up when the function is activated. X To switch on: press the à button. The indicator lamps below à and In damp weather, only switch off the "Cooling ¿ light up. with air dehumidification" function briefly. >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Otherwise the windows can mist up more X To switch off: press the ^ button. quickly. The indicator lamp below ^ lights up. Demisting the windscreen Setting the temperature X Press the ¬ button. X Move the slider in small increments to the The indicator lamp above ¬ lights up left or right. when the windscreen is being demisted. In automatic mode, the set temperature is Use this setting only until the windscreen is maintained at a constant level. The air dis- clear again.

Z 94 Operating the climate control system

Demisting the rear window Rno pre-selection The pre-entry climate control is deacti- When the rear window heating is activated, vated. the exterior mirrors are also heated. RTwo stored departure times Press the ¤ button. X Activate The indicator lamp above ¤ lights up X Departure time > select to acti- when the rear window heating is activated. vate the stored departure time. If Smart- Charging was selected before, this setting Use this setting only until the rear window is is also activated. clear again. X Departure time > select Change to change the settings of a stored departure time. Drying windows that are misted up on the X Set the value. inside X Select Smart-Charging or instant charg‐ ing. X Press the ¿ button. Press the à button. A display message is shown with the selec- X ted settings. X If the windows are still misted up, press the ¬ button. If Smart-Charging is selected, the high- voltage battery charges at minimum cost Use this setting only until the windows are while also conserving battery life. clear again. Depending on the set departure time, charging of the high-voltage battery may Drying windows that are misted up on the not start immediately or may be interrup- outside ted during the charging process.

X Switch on the windscreen wipers. i The charging station must support the Press the ¬ button. transmission of tariff information in order X for the optimised charging process with Use this setting only until the windows are Smart-Charging to be possible. If the clear again. charging station does not provide tariff information, set the preferred charging Setting the pre-entry climate control at times on the "smart control" website. departure time using the on-board com- i If instant charging is selected, the puter high-voltage battery is charged regard- less of the cost information. A part of the Only for instrument cluster with colour dis- charging may not be conducted until play: one to two hours before the departure time, The "Pre-entry climate control at departure in order for temperature control of the time" function heats or cools the vehicle high-voltage battery to be carried out for interior before the scheduled departure time. the intended departure time. The climate control runs until approx. 10 minutes after the set departure time. The vehicle must be connected to the charger Adjusting the air vents

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. in order to activate pre-entry climate con- trol. The battery charge and the charge out- Please note put of the high-voltage battery must be suf- ficient. G WARNING If pre-entry climate control cannot be oper- Very hot or very cold air can flow from the ated, a display message is shown in the on- board computer. air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the X Call up Pre-heat/cool and charge in the on-board computer. air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants X Press a. always maintain a sufficient distance to X Select one of the following settings: Activating/deactivating the seat heating and steering wheel heating 95

the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the Activating/deactivating the seat heat- airflow to another area of the vehicle inte- ing and steering wheel heating rior. G WARNING G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating If you pour cleaning fluid or disinfectant can cause the seat cushion, the backrest into the vehicle's ventilation system, it pad and parts of the steering wheel to may ignite. There is a risk of fire. become very hot. The health of persons Never spray these or other agents into the with limited temperature sensitivity or a ventilation system. Always have work on limited ability to react to higher tempera- the ventilation system carried out at a tures may be affected or they may even qualified specialist workshop. suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Keep the following rules in mind for optimal Therefore, do not switch the seat heating climate control: on repeatedly. RKeep the air slots between the service cover and windscreen clear of blockages. ! When the seat heating is switched on, the RDo not cover the vents or ventilation grilles seat surface can be damaged as a result of in the vehicle interior. objects being placed on the seats, for ROpen the air vents fully. example, seat cushions, child seats and protective covers not approved by Opening and closing the air vents Mercedes-Benz. Ensure that there are no objects on the seat surface when the seat heating is switched on.

X To open 1: turn the vent outwards. X To close 2: turn the vent inwards. The seat heating only works when the igni- Directing the air vents tion is switched on. Vehicles with the Winter package are additionally equipped with >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. X Turn the air vents upwards, downwards, to "Steering wheel heating" function :. the left or to the right as desired. X Press button =. Indicator lamp ; lights up when seat heating is activated. Vehicles with the Winter package: steering wheel heating : is also switched on when the driver's seat heating is activated.

Z 96 Using the accessories

Using the accessories Using the cigarette lighter

G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga- rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls X To open: lift up cover :. Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to To close: push down cover . objects, for example X : To remove: pull the ashtray up and out. There is a risk of fire and injury. X X To insert: insert the ashtray into the cup Always hold the cigarette lighter by the holder. knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Using the 12 V socket

The cigarette lighter only works when the X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition ignition is switched on. lock. X Press cigarette lighter :. X Lift up the cover of socket :. When cigarette lighter : is hot, it pops up X Connect the device. automatically. The socket can be used for accessories up to a maximum draw of 120 W (15 A). If you use the socket for very long periods

>> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Using the ash tray when the engine is switched off, the 12 V battery may discharge. ! The cup holder in the centre console is not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga- rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is fully inserted in the cup holder. Fitting and removing the floormats Make sure that lit cigarettes do not fall into the cup holder. G WARNING Otherwise, the cup holder could be dam- Objects in the driver's footwell may aged. restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises Using the accessories 97

the operating and road safety of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's foot- well. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another.

X Slide the driver's seat backwards. X To install: press securing knobs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: release securing knobs : from retainers ;. >> Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Z 98 Using the parking aid

Parking Please note

G WARNING When the engine is switched off, the auto- matic transmission shifts into neutral position N. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Always shift to parking position P before switching off the engine. Secure the parked vehicle against rolling away by applying The parking aid uses three sensors : in the the parking brake. rear bumper to monitor the area around the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly The parking aid measures the distance >> Parking and getting out. against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehi- between the vehicle and an obstacle. If the cle or its drivetrain could be damaged. proximity to the object behind the vehicle is less than 1.20 m, a short signal is issued. If the object is less than 30 cm away, a contin- Parking the vehicle uous warning tone is issued. The parking aid might not function correctly X Apply the parking brake. under the following circumstances: X Shift the transmission to position j. Rthe vehicle is on uneven terrain X Turn the key to position u in the ignition Rif there are obstacles below or above the lock and remove it. sensor detection range X On steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn Rthe vehicle is on snow or near objects that the front wheels towards the kerb. absorb ultrasonic waves X Lock the vehicle. Rthe vehicle is near strong ultrasonic sour- ces, such as pneumatic hammers If you engage reverse gear while the engine Using the parking aid is running, the parking aid is activated. Useful information ! Pay attention to people and obstacles Activating and deactivating parking when manoeuvring or parking the car. The aid driver is responsible in these situations. The electronic parking aid gives an acoustic indication of the distance between the vehi- cle and an obstacle behind it.

The parking aid is automatically activated when you start the engine. Using the reversing camera 99

X Press the switch. When the parking aid is deactivated, the LED on the switch lights up.

Using the reversing camera Please note The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the imme- diate surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with Reversing camera : is located above the you. Make sure that there are no persons, licence plate in the tailgate. animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a area while manoeuvring or parking. mirror image in the smart Media-System dis- ! If the rear of your vehicle is damaged, play. >> Parking and getting out. consult a qualified specialist workshop The reversing camera may show a distorted and have the reversing camera checked. view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or not at all if: ! Objects that are not at ground level appear further away than they actually Rthe obstacle is very close to the rear are, for example: bumper Rthe obstacle is underneath the rear Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behind bumper Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe obstacle is close to the tailgate handle Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe reversing camera is covered by addi- Rthe tail-end of a lorry tional accessories, e.g. a bicycle rack Rslanted posts Rthe reversing camera function is impaired Only use the image from the reversing due to pixel errors camera as a guide. You may otherwise The function of the reversing camera is limi- damage your vehicle and/or the object. ted: Rif the tailgate is open Rif there is heavy rain, snowfall or fog Understanding the reverse camera Rif the light conditions are too dark or too functions bright ! Pay attention to people and obstacles Rif there is fluorescent light shining, e.g. when manoeuvring or parking the car. The under fluorescent lamps or LED lighting driver is responsible in these situations. Rif the outside temperature changes ! If the rear of your vehicle is damaged, quickly consult a qualified specialist workshop Rif the camera lens is dirty, obstructed or and have the reversing camera checked. misted up(Y page 162) The reversing camera is a visual parking and Rif the camera or the rear of your vehicle is manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind damaged your vehicle with guide lines in the smart i The display contrast may be impaired Media-System display. due to incident sunlight or other light sources, e.g. if the vehicle is being driven out of a garage. In this case, pay special attention. i The use of the display can be considera- bly restricted due to pixel errors, for exam-

Z 100 Using the reversing camera

ple. In this case have the display repaired Switching on the reversing camera or replaced. The ignition must be switched on to use the reversing camera. Guide lines in the display X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle > Settings > Rear camera > Rear camera Useful information view settings > Rear camera view. Confirm with Done. ! Objects that are not at ground level X appear further away than they actually X Engage reverse gear. are, for example: The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the smart Media-System Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behind display. Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe tail-end of a lorry Switching off the reversing camera R

>> Parking and getting out. slanted posts After driving forwards briefly, the reversing Only use the image from the reversing camera will switch itself off. camera as a guide. You may otherwise damage your vehicle and/or the object. Guide lines in different colours show the dis- Adjusting the reversing camera set- tance of obstacles from the rear of the vehi- cle. Static guide lines do not change when the tings steering wheel is turned. Dynamic guide X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle lines change depending on the position of > Settings > Rear camera > Rear camera the steering wheel. view settings. The following settings can be selected: RSwitch Rear camera view on or off. RSwitch Static guidelines on or off. RSwitch Dynamic guidelines on or off. X Select the desired settings. X Confirm with Done.

Adjusting reversing camera display settings : Static: vehicle width including exterior mirrors X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle > Settings > Rear camera > Image ; Green, static: approx. 1.50 m settings. = Yellow, static: approx. 0.7 m X Adjust the values for Brightness, Satura‐ ? Red, static: approx. 0.3 m tion and Contrast. A Blue, dynamic: vehicle width including Confirm the display settings with Done. exterior mirrors X The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system 101

Locking the vehicle X Close the service cover. X Press the & button on the key. The alarm system is primed after approx- G WARNING imately 30 seconds. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other Deactivating and switching off the persons or road users alarm R get out and be struck by oncoming traffic X Press the % button on the key. Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example: Rreleasing the parking brake >> Parking and getting out. Rshifting the transmission out of park position P Rstarting the vehicle's drive system There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children.

X Press the & button on the key. The turn signals flash twice.

Priming and deactivating the anti- theft alarm system Useful information The immobiliser prevents the vehicle from being started without the correct key. It is switched on and off automatically. The anti-theft alarm system triggers a visual and audible alarm if a door, the tailgate or the service cover is opened. The alarm is not switched off, even if, for example, you close the open door that has triggered it.

Priming

X Close the doors. X Close the tailgate.

Z 102 Overview of the on-board computer

Overview of the on-board computer Monochrome display overview Please note

G WARNING If you operate information and communi- cation equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be : Time sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- ; Transmission display tion to road and traffic conditions and = Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp operate the equipment with the vehicle ? Outside temperature display and black stationary. ice warning Ò >> Operating the on-board computer. A Trip meter, remaining range, service dis- G WARNING play If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- B Tyre pressure monitor functioned, you may not recognise func- C eco score display tion restrictions relevant to safety. The D Brake lamp failure warning lamp operating safety of your vehicle may be E Total distance recorder impaired. There is a risk of an accident. F Cruise control, limiter Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Colour display overview

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, you must park the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Consult a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Display messages and displays in the instrument cluster are only shown for cer- tain systems. Vehicle owners and drivers are responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is operating safely. A vehicle which is not oper- ating safely can cause an accident. The display shows the outside temperature on the far right in the header. Drivers must Time pay special attention to road conditions : when temperatures are around freezing ; Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp point. Changes in the outside temperature = Digital speedometer are displayed after a short delay. ? Outside temperature display with black After opening the door, the on-board com- ice warning Ò puter is activated for approximately A Display field for display messages, 15 minutes. To permanently activate the on- menus and lists board computer, the ignition must be B Remaining range switched on. C ECO mode, radar-based recuperation Calling up displays 103

D Transmission display Calling up displays (colour display) E Cruise control, limiter Calling up displays

Calling up displays Calling up displays (monochrome dis- play) >> Operating the on-board computer.

: Colour display ; Left control panel

X Briefly press 9 or : on left control panel ;, to scroll forwards or backwards. X Press and hold 9 or : on left control : Monochrome display panel ;, to directly call up the Distance ; Buttons on the multifunction lever display. X To scroll forward at menu level, briefly The following displays can be called up one press the ´ button on multifunction after another: lever. RDistance X To directly call up the trip meter, press and hold the ´ button on multifunction RTrip computer from start lever. RTrip computer from reset X Press and hold a on the multifunction Reco score from start lever to reset the values. RFuel consumption bar chart The following displays can be called up one REnergy flow after another: RPre-heat/cool and charge Rtrip meter RMessages and service Rremaining range RSettings Rservice due date RDigital speedometer Rsetting the time Ractivating/deactivating Active Brake Assist Rrestarting the tyre pressure monitor

Z 104 Calling up displays

Distance display When the eco score display is reset, the from start trip computer in the smart Media-Sys- tem and the eco score display are also reset in the smart Media-System.

Fuel consumption bar chart display

: Trip meter ; Total distance recorder

Trip computer display : Energy consumption ; Recuperation The display shows the average energy con- sumption and recuperation over the previous

>> Operating the on-board computer. 15 minutes.

Energy flow display : Elapsed time ; Distance = Average speed ? Average energy consumption The data in the from start menu refers to the start of the journey, whilst the data in the from reset menu refers to the last time the submenu was reset. Total output If the ignition remains switched off for lon- : ger than four hours, the from start values in ; Output for electrical consumers the instrument cluster are reset. The eco The total output shows the driver the sum of score display is also reset automatically. the energy currently flowing from the bat- tery. The colour of the battery shows whether eco score display energy is being consumed or recuperated: RBattery symbol is orange: energy is being consumed. RBattery symbol is green: energy is being recuperated. RBattery symbol is grey: energy consump- tion and recuperation are equal or both at 0 kW. The output for electrical consumers shows The eco score display provides feedback on the driver what output is needed to operate how economical the driver's driving behav- electrical consumers, e.g. climate control iour is ( page 67). systems or the radio. If the value is kept as Y low as possible, a greater range is achieved. If the ignition remains switched off for lon- ger than four hours, the eco score display will be automatically reset. Setting values 105

Pre-entry climate control and charging Digital speedometer display display The display shows the digital speedometer. The digital speedometer in the header is hid- den. United Kingdom only: the digital speedome- ter in the header continues to be displayed.

Setting values : Time of the full charge Setting values (monochrome display) ; Charge status of the battery = Departure time Setting the time ? Smart-Charging X Press ´ repeatedly until ° is shown A Charge current and charge output next to the time. An arrow underneath the battery indicates X Press a until the hour display flashes. the charge status of the battery at the depar- Set values. ture time. The charge status and the time of X complete charge are only predicted approx- >> Operating the on-board computer. imately. The time of complete charge cannot Deactivating or activating Active Brake be displayed when Smart-Charging is acti- Assist vated. Press several times until Ä and Information on the "Pre-entry climate con- X ´ ° are displayed. trol at departure time" function (Y page 94). X Press a until on or OFF appears below Ä. Messages and service display The ^ indicator lamp lights up when Active Brake Assist is deactivated.

Resetting values The trip meter display and eco score display can be reset. X Scroll to the desired display. : Message memory X Press a for three seconds. ; Next service due date The display shows the number of display messages in the message memory and the Setting values (colour display) next service due date. Setting values ¯ indicates a minor service. ° indi- cates a major service. To show the display messages, the ignition must be switched on. X Press a to scroll through the display messages. Current information on the type of service can be obtained at a smart centre or a quali- fied specialist workshop. X Press 9 or : to scroll to Settings. X Press 9 or : to scroll to the desired menu.

Z 106 Setting values

X Press 9 or : to set the desired data. England only: only the display unit of the digital speedometer is set. X Press a to confirm.

Resetting values Setting the unit of measurement for dis- tance X Press a. Select Settings > Display > Units of X Select yes and press a to confirm. X distance. Set the value. Setting the time X

X Select Settings > Time > Set the time. Setting the temperature unit Set values. X Select Settings > Display > Units of Vehicles with smart Media-System: the X temperature. time and time format are set in the smart Media-System. X Set the value.

Setting the time format Switching radar-based recuperation off and on >> Operating the on-board computer. X Select Settings > Time > 12/24 Time for‐ mat. To switch on radar-based recuperation, the Set the value. conditions for activation must be fulfilled X and the ignition must be switched on. X Select Settings > Radar assist.recuper‐ Adjusting the instrument cluster light- ation > on or off. ing Information on radar-based recuperation X Select Settings > Display > Display/ (Y page 65). switch brightness. X Set the value. Deactivating or activating Active Brake Assist Displaying the digital speedometer in the The ignition must be switched on in order to header set Active Brake Assist.

X Select Settings > Display > Digital X Select Settings > Active Brake Assist > speedometer. on or off. X Select the Disp. addit. dig. speedo. Information on Active Brake Assist function. (Y page 54). The digital speedometer is displayed in the header. Starting the tyre pressure monitor England only: the digital speedometer in the header cannot be hidden. X Select Settings > Tyre pressure monitor. Information on the tyre pressure monitor Setting the unit for speed in the digital (Y page 157). speedometer Switching ambient lighting on/off X Select Settings > Display > Digital speedometer > Unit. X Select Settings > Ambient lighting > On. X Set the value. The following values are set: RDigital speedometer display RDigital speedometer in the header Setting values 107

Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting

X Select Settings > Ambient lighting > Brightness. X Set the value.

Setting the language

X Select Settings > Language (Language). X Set the value. >> Operating the on-board computer.

Z 108 Operating and setting the smart Audio-System

Operating and setting the smart Audio- H $ Switches on the radio and selects System the waveband I External audio equipment (AUX connec- smart Audio-System overview tion) J Volume control, Ü button WARNING G K F Sets the radio text If you operate information and communi- cation equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from Operating and setting the smart Audio- the traffic situation. This could also cause System you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a To switch on or off: press Ü. risk of an accident. X To scroll through menus: turn control B. Only operate this equipment when the X To select menu options: turn control B traffic situation permits. If you cannot be X and press the 9 button. sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- X To navigate to the next-highest folder: tion to road and traffic conditions and press the % button. operate the equipment with the vehicle X To set values: turn control B and press the stationary. 9 button. You must observe the legal requirements for X To increase or decrease the volume: turn control J. >> Using the smart Audio-System. the country in which you are currently driv- ing when operating the smart Audio-System.

Using external devices Useful information You can connect the following external devi- ces: RUSB devices, iPods® and MP3 players (USB port) RExternal audio equipment (AUX connec- tion) RBluetooth® devices, such as mobile phones : Number keys 1 - 6 External devices can be charged at USB ports ; C Previous station or track = and C when the ignition is switched on. It = USB1 port and bracket connection for is better to use USB port = for charging as it mobile phone with smart cross connect supplies a higher charge current. To charge app an external device remove the cover on USB ? D Next station or track port =. A % Goes back one menu level higher B Control for menu selection and station list, 9 button Using the smartphone bracket USB2 port C Useful information D Ã Telephone menu to accept or reject calls i Operating smartphones in the smart- E ª System settings phone bracket is permitted exclusively in F 8 Mute connection with the smart cross connect app. G Õ Plays back media from external data carriers Operating and setting the smart Audio-System 109

The smartphone bracket keeps your mobile Inserting and removing the mobile phone phone secured in the vehicle. In order to use the smart cross connect app, rotate the X To insert: press the right-hand raised but- mobile phone to landscape mode. ton on the bottom edge of the smartphone You can use the USB port behind the smart- bracket. phone bracket on the left to charge your The upper tensioning arm opens. mobile phone during the journey with a suit- X If necessary, press the left-hand button on able charging cable. Mobile phones and other the bottom edge of the smartphone USB devices can be charged when the igni- bracket. tion is switched on. The tensioning arms on the side open. The smartphone bracket is suitable for X Set the mobile phone in the smartphone mobile phones with the following dimen- bracket. sions: X If necessary, press the tensioning arms on the side together to set them to the size of Rthickness: 6 – 10 mm the mobile phone. Rwidth: 55 – 82 mm X Press down the upper tensioning arms to Rlength: 120 – 162 mm secure the mobile phone. Further information is available from any X To remove: press the right-hand raised smart centre. button on the bottom edge of the smart- phone bracket. Removing and fastening the cover of the The upper tensioning arm opens. USB1 port X Remove the mobile phone from the smart- phone bracket. >> Using the smart Audio-System.

Operating the smart Audio-System via the mobile phone You can use the smart cross connect app for iOS and Android™ to operate the smart Audio-System via a mobile phone. X Download the smart cross connect app from the App Store® (iOS) or Google Play™ (Android™) and install it on the mobile phone. X To remove: turn the cover anti-clockwise using handle :. X Connect the mobile phone with the smart Audio-System via Bluetooth®. X Press on marking ;. X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket. X Remove the cover. Further information about operating the X To secure: place the cover in position ;. smart Audio-System via mobile phone can be Turn the cover clockwise using handle . X : found in the smart cross connect app user's guide. Fitting the smartphone bracket Remove the cover from the USB1 port. X Adjusting the system settings X Connect the smartphone bracket to USB1 and turn the locking mechanism clock- Setting the system language wise. X Press the ª button. X Select Language. The list of languages appears. X Select the language.

Z 110 Listening to the radio

Switching the time on or off X Select Audio Default. X Select Yes . X Press the ª button. X Select Clock. Adjusting the volume to the vehicle X Select ON or OFF. speed (vehicles without JBL sound sys- tem) Setting the time X Press the ª button. X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Clock. X Select Speed Vol.. X Select Set Time. X Select the desired level. X Set the time. The higher the level, the higher the volume will be at increasing road speeds. Setting the time format Press the ª button. X Listening to the radio X Select Clock. X Select Format. Switching on the radio X Choose one of the following time formats: X Press the Ü button. RAm/Pm X Press the $ button. >> Using the smart Audio-System. R24hr The smart Audio-System receives data transmitted via the Radio Data System (RDS). Adjusting the audio settings Adjusting the sound Selecting a waveband Press the ª button. X Press the $ button repeatedly until the X desired waveband appears. X Select Audio. Select Sound. If available, you can switch between the fol- X lowing wavebands: X Select the desired sound settings: RFM1 RBass: adjusts the bass. RFM2 RTreble: adjusts the treble. RDR1 (digital radio) RBal.: adjusts the surround sound (bal- ance) to left or right. RDR2 (digital radio) RAM Switching the bass boost on or off (vehi- cles without JBL sound system) Selecting stations manually Press the ª button. X FM and AM waveband X Select Audio. X Select Bass Boost. X Press the D or C button to set the desired frequency. X Select ON or OFF.

Resetting audio settings Digital radio frequency range Press the ª button. X To select the desired station, press the X D or C button. X Select Audio. Listening to the radio 111

Setting a station from the station list Digital radio (if available)

X Press a in radio mode. Information on DAB The station list appears. X Select a station. i Any electronic devices taken into the Press a to confirm. vehicle may seriously impair radio and X DAB radio reception. Digital radio or DAB (Digital Audio Broad- casting) is a digital transmission standard Updating the station list optimally designed for the mobile reception X Press the $ button until you hear a of radio transmissions. Several programmes tone. are combined into so-called ensembles and transmitted on a single frequency. Some sta- tions only transmit programmes at certain times. If you have selected a programme that Storing a station has subsequently been removed from the Select a waveband. ensemble, it will no longer be received. You X will continue to receive the other pro- X Set the station. grammes in the ensemble. Select either a dif- X Press a number key 1 to 6 until you hear ferent programme or a different ensemble. a tone. The station set for this waveband will be i DAB cannot be received everywhere in saved at the button you have pressed. Europe. >> Using the smart Audio-System.

Displaying radio text Selecting a stored station This function provides additional data Select a waveband. transmitted in the DAB waveband (DR1 and X DR2). Besides displaying the artist and track X Press a number key for the stored station. names, information on the current pro- gramme may also be available. X Press the F button. Switching traffic announcements X Select Radio text. on/off The î dot shows that radio text is acti- vated. X Press the ª button. X Select Radio. Setting alerts X Select TA. X Select ON or OFF. If this function is activated, certain pro- gramme categories allow another broadcast to interrupt the current audio playback. Numerous categories can be selected, such as Interrupting a traffic announcement news, business news, sports news etc. X During a traffic announcement, briefly A prerequisite for the reception is that press %. broadcasters process the relevant informa- tion. This function is only available in cer- tain countries. Displaying radio text in FM radio X Call up the setup menu (Y page 109). X Radio > DR Interrupt > Select the desired X Press the F button. category. If radio text is available, it will be dis- The î dot shows the active settings. played. i Several categories can be selected. Repeat the procedure if necessary.

Z 112 Using a mobile phone

Displaying the EPG Switching on the Bluetooth® function of EPG (Electronic Program Guide) is available the smart Audio-System in the DAB waveband (DR1 and DR2). X Press the à button. If the station supports EPG, you can use the X Turn control B to Bluetooth and confirm EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) to display with 9. the current and the following two radio pro- grammes. At the very least, the programme X Turn control B to ON and confirm with 9. overview contains the name, time and length The î dot shows the active setting. of each programme. X Press the F button. Authorising a mobile phone on the smart X Select EPG. Audio-System X Select the desired station. X Press the à button. X Select Scan devices. Switching on Intellitext™ The system searches for available mobile phones and displays them in a list. If the station supports Intellitext™, you can Select the mobile phone and confirm with have additional information displayed, such X 9. as news, headlines, business news, sports news etc. A prerequisite for the reception is X Do one of the following: that broadcasters process the relevant infor- Rif a code appears in the smart Audio- mation. Intellitext™ is only available in cer- System display and on the mobile phone, >> Using the smart Audio-System. tain countries. confirm it on the mobile phone R X Press the F button. if the code 0000 appears in the smart Select Intellitext. Audio-System display, enter it and con- X firm it on the mobile phone A maximum of five mobile phones can be authorised. However, only one authorised Using a mobile phone mobile phone can be connected with Blue- ® Connecting a mobile phone tooth at a time. Useful information Loading and updating the phone book ® The Bluetooth -capable mobile phone must X Press the à button. be compatible with the smart Audio-System. X Select Settings > PB download. Overview of compatible mobile phones: X If necessary, accept the access confirma- http://www.smart.com/connect. tion on the mobile phone. ® To make a call, Bluetooth must be activated ® on the mobile phone and the smart Audio- If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth System. PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) profile, the ® phone book and call lists will be transferred Once outside the Bluetooth reception range, after you connect. the connection is terminated automatically. To clearly identify a mobile phone, change Removing a mobile phone from the list the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). (de-authorising) X Press the à button. ® Activating Bluetooth on a mobile phone X Select Del. device. Authorised mobile phones are displayed. Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone X Select the mobile phone to be removed. (see the manufacturer's operating instruc- X tions). X Select YES. X Search for devices. Using a mobile phone 113

® After de-authorisation, the Bluetooth con- X Dial the selected phone number. nection to the mobile phone is no longer X Press the 9 button. established automatically. Dialling a number Connecting another authorised mobile phone X Press the à button.

® X Select Dial a number. X Activating Bluetooth on a mobile phone An input screen appears. Press the à button. X X Enter the number. X Select Sel. device. Press the 9 button. All authorised mobile phones are dis- X played. The currently connected mobile X Select ;. phone is indicated by a dot. X Select the desired mobile phone from the Using call lists to call contacts list. To call a contact in a call list, the mobile phone telephone book first has to be impor- ted into the smart Audio-System. Setting the sound X Press the à button. Adjusting the call volume X Select Call lists. X Select Dialed, Received or Missed. Press the à button. X >> Using the smart Audio-System. X Select an entry from the list. X Select Settings > Volume > Call. Select the setting. X Calling the last number dialled

Switching the smart Audio-System ring- X Press and hold the à button until the tone on and off call is established. X Press the à button. Accepting a call X Select Settings > Ringtone. X Press the à button. X To switch on: select Car. X To switch off: select Phone. Rejecting a call

Adjusting the ringtone volume X Press and hold the à button until the call is rejected. X Press the à button. Select Settings > Volume > Ring. X Holding and continuing a call X Select the setting. X To place a call on hold: select Â. X To continue the call: press the 9 button. Telephone operation Transferring a call to the mobile phone Calling a contact from the phone book Select z. To call a contact in the phone book, the X mobile phone telephone book first has to be X To transfer the call back to the smart imported into the smart Audio-System. Audio-System: press 9. X Press the à button. X Select Telephone book. X Select the contact. The details for the contact are displayed.

Z 114 Operating external data storage media

Entering numbers or characters during a RAUX (external audio equipment) call RBT Audio (with Bluetooth® connected device, such as a mobile phone) X Select #123. X Enter numbers or characters. Selecting external data carriers Ending a call X Press the Õ button repeatedly until the X Press the 9 button. desired media source appears in the dis- play.

Using voice control of the mobile phone Operating a USB device or iPod® Useful information Connecting a device Voice control of the connected mobile phone can be used (see manufacturer's operating X Connect the device to the USB port. instructions). Not all voice control services The device is activated automatically and are supported by the smart Audio-System. the first track is played. Voice control must be activated in the set- tings menu of the mobile phone. Selecting a track

>> Using the smart Audio-System. Starting voice control of the mobile X In USB mode, press the 9 button. phone Available tracks or folders are displayed. X Turn control B. Connect the mobile phone with the smart X X Press 9 to confirm. Audio-System via Bluetooth®. X Press the button on the steering Rapid search wheel. A message appears in the display of the X Press the 9 button. smart Audio-System and a tone sounds. An entry field appears. Voice control of the mobile phone is active. X To enter characters, turn control B and X Say a command. press the 9 button.

Ending voice control of the mobile phone Skipping to the next or previous track

X Press the button on the steering X Press the D or C button briefly to wheel. skip to the next track or press longer for or rapid scrolling. X Press the 9 button. Voice control of the mobile phone is ended. Switching random track sequence on/off

X Press the C button. Operating external data storage media Switching the repeat function on/off Useful information X Press the number key. You can switch between the following media sources, depending on the type of external data carrier connected: RUSB 1 or iPod 1 RUSB 2 or iPod 2 Operating external data storage media 115

Selecting a track from a category with an Displaying metadata iPod® connected X Press the F button repeatedly until the desired metadata is displayed. X Press the 9 button. X Select the category from a list. Different categories, such as playlists, artists or albums, can be selected, depend- ing on the connected device.

Displaying metadata

X Press the F button repeatedly until the desired metadata is displayed.

Operating external audio equipment (AUX) Connecting a device

X Connect the device to the AUX jack. Use the Õ button to access the media on a connected AUX device. >> Using the smart Audio-System.

Adjusting the volume of external audio equipment

X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select AUX In. X Select one of the following options for the volume: RLow RMedium RHigh

Bluetooth® device operation Connecting a device

® X Connect a Bluetooth audio device the same way you connect a mobile phone with Bluetooth®.

Skipping to the next or previous track

X Press the D or C button briefly to skip to the next track or press longer for rapid scrolling.

Z 116 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Operating and setting up the smart Controls on the smart Media-System Media-System Operating the smart Media-System Please note Some functions are restricted while driving.

Controls

: Previous station or track and fast rewind ; Mute = Next station or track and fast forward ? Switches to the home screen A Ü On/off button and volume control B Touchscreen

Ports on the centre console : Switches voice control system on and off, accepts and ends a phone call

>> Using the smart Media-System. ; W Increases the volume = X Reduces the volume ? smart Media-System display

Voice control system The following functions are possible using the voice control system of the smart Media- System: Renter a destination for navigation Rmake a call : Port for external audio equipment (AUX) Rstart an application ; USB port = SD card slot Some devices, for example mobile phones or USB drives, connect with the smart Media- System via USB port ;. External devices with 5 V (1 A) can be charged on USB port ; when the ignition is switched on. Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 117

Overview of home screen i The home screen can be set to display the energy flow. If the home page is set so as to display the eco score, you can switch to the eco score appli- cation by tapping on the area. When Android Auto™ or MirrorLink® is active, another symbol is displayed on the home page. You can switch to the relevant smart- phone screen application by tapping on the symbol.

Switching the smart Media-System on and off : Radio station, media track ; Number of messages in the message Switching on automatically memory X Start the engine. = Status of the mobile phone and field strength of the mobile phone network Switching off automatically ? Outside temperature X Switch off the ignition and open the door. A Time B Map Switching on and off manually C Next navigation manoeuvre X Press the Ü button. D Context menu

E Distance to the destination and estima- Restarting >> Using the smart Media-System. ted time of arrival X Press the Ü button. F Favourites menu The smart Media-System shuts down and G Main menu restarts. H Telephone menu, status of the mobile i The restart can take several minutes. phone and field strength of the mobile During the restart, the audio volume can- phone network not be adjusted. X To call up a function, tap on an area on the home page or on a symbol. Scrolling through a menu or list on the The following functions can be selected: touchscreen R:: to switch to radio or media application X Touch the touchscreen with your finger. R;: to call up message memory X Swipe up, down, left or right. R=: to switch to telephone application The selection on the display will then move R?: to call up the weather forecast for the in the respective direction. current location RA: to display time and temperature in full Selecting items on the touchscreen screen or to call up time settings RB: to switch to full screen navigation view X Tap on a menu, an option or an application with one finger. RD: to change language, change home The menu, the option or the application is page, remove an SD card or switch off the launched. display RF: to view, call up or change favourites RG: to call up the main menu RH: to switch to telephone application 118 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Controlling media playback on the Adjusting the system settings touchscreen Adjusting the display X Swipe to the left. The next media item is played or dis- Setting the daytime brightness played, e.g. the next track or station. X Select System > Display . X Swipe to the right. Playback is restarted or the previous X Move the Daytime brightness control to media item is played or displayed, e.g. the the left or right. previous track. Setting the night time brightness Media playback can be controlled in the fol- lowing playback modes: X Select System > Display . Move the Nighttime brightness control RRadio mode X to the left or right. RMusic and audio playback RImage playback Activating automatic switching between RVideo playback day and night mode X Select System > Display > Automatic day/ Calling up menus night mode.

X Select Menu on the home screen. Displaying day mode constantly X Select one of the following submenus. X Select System > Display. Submenus: X Remove the tick for Automatic day/night RMultimedia mode and Force night mode.

>> Using the smart Media-System. Radio and media playback RNavigation Displaying night mode constantly Navigation system X Select System > Display > Force night RTelephone mode. Mobile phone functions RVehicle Setting the system language Reversing camera, eco score, energy flow X Select System > Language. and consumption details A list of available languages is displayed. RServices X Select the desired language. TomTom Services RSystem i The language of the spoken navigation General system settings announcement can be selected independ- ently of the system language. Confirming settings Changing the on-screen keyboard X Select Done. Settings are accepted. X Select System > Keyboards. X Select the keyboard layout. The following keyboard layouts can be Switching off the display selected: X Select home page > W > Switch off RLatin screen. RGreek RCyrillic For the Latin keyboard layout, it is possible to choose between the ABCD, QWERTY, AZERTY and QWERTZ layouts. Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 119

Selecting the home screen display Current GPS signal strength RNetwork status Different displays are available for the home page which display up-to-date information Signal strength of the data connection about the applications in the smart Media- RLicences System. For free and open-source software used X Select System > Home page . RCopyright A selection of home screen displays For text in the TomTom software used. appears. X Select the desired display. Adjusting the audio settings Resetting to factory settings Setting the volume X Select System > Restore factory set‐ tings. X Select System > Sound > Sound levels. X Confirm with Yes. X Select the volume setting. All settings changed in the system return The following volume settings can be to the default values. All destinations, selected: routes and favourites will be deleted. RMain volume For the whole system Setting the time manually RHands-free

X Select System > Clock > Set time. For the hands-free system R X Change the minutes and hours of the time Ringtone

shown. Ring tone volume >> Using the smart Media-System. RNavigation Activating automatic time adjustment Volume for the whole navigation system RComputer voice X Select System > Clock > Set time > Auto‐ matic time adjustment. Volume of the computer-generated voice RApp events Volume of events triggered by apps Setting the time format X Set the desired volume. X Select System > Clock > Time format. X Select the time format. Adjusting the volume to the vehicle The following time formats can be selec- speed (vehicles without JBL sound sys- ted: tem) R18:00 The speed-dependent volume adjustment R6:00 PM function adapts the volume to the current R6:00 vehicle speed. X Select System > Sound > Speed sensitiv‐ Displaying status and information ity volume. Select System > Status & Information. X Move the Speed dependency control to the X left or right. X Select the information. The higher the value, the more the volume The following information can be selected: increases with the speed of the vehicle. RVersion information Volume adjustment is not set using the con- Software and hardware of the Media- trol but automatically. System RGPS status 120 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Adjusting surround sound (balance) Creating and deleting favourites X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound > Creating favourites Balance > Manual. X Move the control to the desired position. X Confirm with Done.

Adjusting the bass and treble

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound > Bass/Treble > Manual. X Use the control to adjust the bass and tre- ble separately.

Setting a neutral sound for the bass and Preset treble : ; Navigation X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound > = Radio Bass/Treble > Neutral. ? Telephone Audio is played without increasing the A Services bass or treble. B Context menu

® Frequently used settings such as phone con- Activating and deactivating arkamys tacts and radio stations can be stored as bass boost (vehicles without JBL sound

>> Using the smart Media-System. favourites. Six favourites can be stored for system) each of the following categories: The arkamys® bass boost setting emphasises RNavigation the bass during playback. RRadio R X Select Multimedia > Settings > Bass Telephone boost Arkamys. RServices Manual activation of arkamys® bass boost on X Select Favourites on the home screen. models with a JBL sound system is not pos- X Select a category. sible. Activation functions automatically. X Select the next empty memory position. A list of possible favourites appears. Setting the volume for warning tones X Select favourites.

X Select System > Sound > Alerts. Deleting favourites X Move the control to the left or right. X Select Favourites on the home screen. Enabling warning tones when the display X Select W > Remove a Favourite. is switched off X Delete a favourite. The following options can be selected: X Select System > Sound > Alerts > Keep audio alerts when screen turned off. RSelect the favourite you wish to delete and confirm with Delete. RTo delete all favourites, select Remove all Favourites. Listening to the radio 121

Listening to the radio "Frequency" display mode (AM and FM radio) Switching on the radio

X Select Multimedia > Radio.

Display modes Useful information In radio mode there are three different dis- play modes, in which various settings can be made: R"List" display mode (FM and digital radio) : Selects the waveband (AM/FM radio) and R"Frequency" display mode (AM and FM preset group (FM) radio) ; Increases or decreases the frequency in R"Presets" display mode small increments = Station search, forwards or backwards "List" display mode (FM and digital ? Context menu radio) A Adjusts the frequency manually B Station currently playing

"Presets" display mode >> Using the smart Media-System.

: Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB radio) and preset group (FM/DAB) ; Selects the previous station = Selects the next station : Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB radio) ? Context menu and preset group (FM/DAB) A "Frequency" display mode ; Stored station B "List" display mode = Context menu C "Presets" display mode ? Station currently playing D Station currently playing

Selecting a station "List" display mode

X Swipe up or down in the station list. X Tap on the desired station. 122 Displaying energy consumption

"Frequency" display mode (AM and FM Receiving traffic reports (i-Traffic) radio) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i- X Slide control on the waveband left or right. Traffic (Traffic program).

Displaying the programme type (e.g. Starting a station search classical)

X Select C or D in the "Frequency" X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > display mode. PTY (Program type).

Switching to the corresponding FM sta- Storing a station tion when digital radio reception is poor Set the station. X X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > X Select W > Save as preset. Simulcast. Up to six stations can be stored for each waveband. Displaying information on certain cate- gories (i-Announcement, digital radio only) Displaying radio text X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i- Radio text contains information such as cur- Announcement. rent track or latest news. X Select an i-Announcements category.

>> Using the smart Media-System. X Select W > Show radio text. Updating the station list

Displaying digital radio services X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > Update radio list. X Select W > DR services. X Select one of the following digital radio services: Displaying energy consumption REPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Programme schedule for the station cur- Calling up the energy flow display rently playing Select Menu > Vehicle > Energy consump‐ RIntellitext X tion > Energy flow. Programme information and programme schedule for the station currently play- The Energy flow display shows the flow of ing energy in the vehicle. RSlide show The colour of the energy flow indicates the Displays images to accompany the cur- following: rent broadcast RGreen colouring: energy is being recuper- ated ROrange colouring: the drive is consuming Other radio settings energy RYellow colouring and an illustration of the Searching for alternative frequencies consumers: electrical consumers are con- with the best possible reception quality suming energy RGrey colouring: no energy is being recu- X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > AF perated or consumed (Alternative frequency). Using a mobile phone 123

Calling up the detailed consumption vehicle, always connect them to the low- display reflection exterior aerial. Select Menu > Vehicle > Energy consump‐ X Bluetooth® must be enabled both on the tion > Consumption details. mobile phone and on the smart Media-Sys- The Consumption details display shows the tem. energy consumption of the drive and elec- trical consumers as well as the energy recu- Enabling and disabling Bluetooth® perated during the previous 15 minutes. The display also shows the total consumption of The mobile phone must be compatible with the drive and electrical consumers as well as the smart Media-System. the total amount of energy recuperated dur- Overview of compatible mobile phones: ing the current journey. https://www.smart.com/connect. The Consumption details display is reset Select Settings > Turn Bluetooth on. each time the engine is switched on. X The setting is marked. Bluetooth® is ena- bled or disabled on the smart Media-Sys- tem. Using a mobile phone Connecting a mobile phone Authorising a mobile phone Please note Authorising a mobile phone for the first time WARNING G Bluetooth® must be enabled on the smart

The electromagnetic radiation from two- Media-System. >> Using the smart Media-System. way radios can interfere with the vehicle X Select Phone menu. electronics if they are manipulated or ret- Confirm the display message with Yes. rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardise X X Enter the security code on the mobile the operating safety of the vehicle. There is phone or accept access confirmation (see a risk of an accident. manufacturer's operating instructions). You should have all work on electrical and The Enabling Bluetooth message electronic components carried out at a appears. qualified specialist workshop. Authorising another mobile phone ® WARNING Bluetooth must be enabled on the smart G Media-System. If you operate two-way radios incorrectly Select Settings > Manage devices. in the vehicle, their electromagnetic radi- X The list of visible mobile phones appears. ation can interfere with the vehicle elec- Select the mobile phone from the list. tronics, for example if: X X Enter the security code on the mobile Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an phone or accept access confirmation (see exterior aerial manufacturer's operating instructions). ® Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly moun- The Bluetooth connection is established. ® ted or is not low-reflection The Bluetooth connection will be estab- lished automatically in future. This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fit- ted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating two-way radios in the

Z 124 Using a mobile phone

Downloading telephone data automati- Calling a contact from the phone book cally X Select Phonebook. X Select Settings > Automatically down‐ X Select the contact. load phone data . X Select the contact's telephone number. X If necessary, accept the access confirma- If the phone book contains multiple contacts, tion on the mobile phone. they can be called up using Find. During connection, up to 1,000 contacts are automatically transferred to the smart Media-System. Dialling a phone number

X Select Dial a number. Connecting another authorised mobile X Enter a number on the keypad. phone X Select Call. X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select the mobile phone. Calling a contact from the call log The current Bluetooth® connection is ter- Select Call logs. minated. The desired mobile phone is con- X nected to the smart Media-System instead. X Select an entry from the list. The call log can be sorted according to calls Removing a mobile phone from the list made, calls received and missed calls using the corresponding receiver icon. X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select W > Delete device(s). Accepting and rejecting an incoming call >> Using the smart Media-System. X Select the mobile phone. If a call is incoming, the following informa- X Select Delete. tion will appear on the display: Rname of caller, if already in the phone book ® Terminating a Bluetooth connection Rnumber of caller, if name of caller is not already in the phone book X Select Settings > Manage devices. RPrivate number, if the caller has the "Hide X Select W > Disconnect all devices. caller ID" function switched on X Select the mobile phone. X To accept the call, select Pick up. ® If the mobile phone leaves the Bluetooth X To reject the call, select Refuse. receiver range, the connection is automati- The call will be forwarded to voicemail. cally terminated. Holding and continuing a call

Telephone operation X Select W > Put on hold. To continue the call, select Resume. Useful information X The following conditions must be fulfilled in Transferring a call to the mobile phone order to make a 999 or 112 emergency call: Ra valid and operational SIM card is inser- X Select W > Handset. ted in the mobile phone Ra mobile phone network is available Ending a call

X Select End call. Using a mobile phone 125

Using the smartphone screen applica- MirrorLink® is available for mobile phones tion with the Android™ operating system. Further information: http://www.smart.com/ Selecting settings for the smartphone connect. screen To use MirrorLink®, observe the following requirements: Selecting the preferred smartphone screen Rthe mobile phone must support Mirror- application Link® version 1.1 and above If mobile phones support Android Auto™ as Rthe mobile phone is switched on well as MirrorLink®, the preferred applica- R ® tion can be selected when a mobile phone is a MirrorLink certified app must be instal- connected. led on the mobile phone Rthe GPS connection must be activated on X Select System > Smartphone Screen > the mobile phone Smartphone Screen application pref‐ erence. Rthe time is set on the smart Media-System ® X Select Android Auto™ or MirrorLink . Setting up a connection ® X Activate MirrorLink on your mobile phone Selecting settings to start Android Auto™ (see the manufacturer's operating instruc- and MirrorLink® tions). X Select System > Smartphone Screen > X Connect a mobile phone with a connecting Android Auto™ Settings. cable to the USB socket in the centre con- or sole. X Select System > Smartphone Screen > Mir‐ X Select Yes. rorLink™ Settings. Apps which have been certified for Mir- >> Using the smart Media-System. ® Select one of the following settings: rorLink will be shown in the smart Media- X System display. RAsk me at each launch If the smartphone has been connected Calling up MirrorLink® apps with the smart Media-System, you will be asked whether the preferred smart- X Tap on the home page of the smart phone screen application should be Media-System. started. MirrorLink® starts in the smart Media- RYes System display. If the smartphone has been connected X Select the desired app. with the smart Media-System, the pre- The display switches to full screen mode. ferred smartphone screen application X To leave full screen display: press and hold will be started automatically. the ò button on the smart Media-Sys- RNo tem until the lower bar is shown. If the smartphone has been connected X To leave the display: select 2. with the smart Media-System, a smart- phone screen application will not be MirrorLink® audio playback started. If your mobile phone supports this function, you can control audio playback via the but- Using MirrorLink® tons on the smart Media-System. X To select the previous track: press the 9 Useful information button. ® MirrorLink is a standard for the connection X To rewind: press and hold the 9 button. between the smart Media-System and a ® X To select the next track: press the : mobile phone. With MirrorLink , the content button. of the display on your mobile phone can be displayed in the smart Media-System.

Z 126 Using a mobile phone

X To fast forward: press and hold the : cles to the mobile phone. This code is not button. related to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted if the smart Media-Sys- X To mute: press the 8 button. tem is reset. Terminating a MirrorLink® connection The following driving status data is trans- mitted: X Select W > Disconnect. Rgear position engaged Using Android Auto™ Rinstrument cluster day/night mode This data is transmitted in order to adapt the Useful information content displayed to the driving situation. Android Auto™ is an application for the con- GPS data such as coordinates, speed and nection between the smart Media-System compass direction is transmitted. This data and a mobile phone. Certain mobile phone is transmitted only when navigation is functions and apps can be controlled via the active in order to improve navigation (e.g. smart Media-System with Android Auto™. when driving through a tunnel). Functions such as telephony, navigation and Setting up a connection the audio playback of Android Auto™ are dis- Activate Android Auto™ on the mobile played on the home page of the smart Media- X phone (see manufacturer's operating System. instructions). Android Auto™ is available for mobile phones Connect a mobile phone with a connecting with the Android™ operating system. X cable to the USB socket in the centre con- Further information: http://www.smart.com/ sole. connect. X Select Yes. >> Using the smart Media-System. In order to use Android Auto™, the following Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media- conditions must be met: System display. Rthe mobile phone supports Android Auto™ starting from Android™ 5.0 Calling up Android Auto™ Rthe mobile phone is switched on X Tap on the home page of the smart Rthe mobile phone has an Internet connec- Media-System. tion Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media- Rthe Android Auto™ app is installed on the System display. mobile phone Rdata sharing must be approved Activating Android Auto™ voice-operated control Transmitted vehicle data when using When Android Auto™ is activated, the system Android Auto™ can be operated with voice control. When using Android Auto™, specific vehicle X data is transmitted to the mobile phone. This Press and hold the button on the mul- makes it possible to use selected mobile tifunction steering wheel for approx- phone services efficiently. The mobile phone imately three seconds. does not have active access to vehicle data. A tone sounds. The following system information is trans- Disconnecting Android Auto™ mitted: X Disconnect the USB connection between Rsmart Media-System software status the mobile phone and the smart Media- Rsystem ID (anonymous) System. This data is transmitted in order to optimise communication between the vehicle and mobile phone. A random vehicle code is generated for this purpose and in order to assign multiple vehi- Connecting and operating external data storage media 127

Using voice control for the mobile Updating the phone book phone A Bluetooth® connection must be present. Useful information X Select Phone book > W > Update phone data. The voice control of the connected mobile phone can be used (see manufacturer's oper- ating instructions). Not all voice control Updating the call log services are supported by the smart Media- Select Call logs > W > Update phone System. X data. The requirement for voice control of the mobile phone is that Android Auto™ or Mir- rorLink® are not active. Adding a contact to favourites

X Select Phone > Phonebook. Activating voice control for the mobile X Select the contact from the list. phone X Select W > Add to Favourites. X Connect the mobile phone with the smart X Dial a phone number. Media-System via Bluetooth®. X Press and hold the button on the steering wheel. Connecting and operating external The symbol appears in the display. data storage media Voice control for the mobile phone is active. Useful information

The following external data storage media >> Using the smart Media-System. can be connected: Further settings RUSB memory stick (USB 2.0 or 3.0 with max. 64 GB) or iPod™ Setting the volume RSD or SDHC card (max. 64 GB) X Select Settings > Sound levels. RExternal audio equipment (AUX connec- tion) X Set the volume of the hands-free system and the ringtone. RBluetooth® devices such as mobile phones The following formats are supported: Activating voicemail RMP3 files RWMA files X Select Voice mail. RACC formats X Enter the voicemail phone number on the keypad. (.AAC, .M4A, .M4B, .M4P, .M4V, .M4R, .MP4 and .3GP) Select Done. X ROGG Vorbis (.OGG, .OGA) Voicemail is activated and the voicemail number is dialled. RPCM 16 bit (.WAV, .PCM) A data storage medium may contain no more than eight directory levels. Configuring voicemail The smart Media-System only recognises the X Select Settings > Voice mail configura‐ first partition of a data storage medium. The tion. partition must be formatted as FAT or FAT32.

Z 128 Connecting and operating external data storage media

Connecting external data storage D Selects a new track based on categories, media e.g. album, genre, folder E Resumes playback at any point in the Connecting a USB memory stick track Insert a USB memory stick in the port on X ® the centre console. Controlling playback from a Bluetooth Playback starts automatically. device

Connecting an SD card

X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in the centre console. Playback starts automatically.

Connecting a Bluetooth® device

® X Authorise and connect a Bluetooth device, such as a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. : Selects a new track ; Selects the previous track Operating external data storage media = Stops playback ? Selects the next track

>> Using the smart Media-System. Selecting connected external data stor- A Displays the playlist age media B Calls up the context menu

X Select Menu > Multimedia > Media . Selecting a different device X Select connected medium. X Select W > Change source. Controlling playback from a USB memory stick or SD card Connecting another authorised Blue- tooth® device

X Select W > Find new device.

Enabling and disabling random playback

X To enable: select W > Enable shuffle. X To disable: select W > Disable shuffle.

Displaying details of tracks on a USB memory stick or SD card : Selects the previous track X Select W > Song details. ; Selects the next track = Stops and continues playback ? Switches track repeat on A Switches random playback on B Calls up the context menu C Displays the playlist Viewing images 129

Selecting a track from current playlist Switching between images

X Select New selection > Folders. X Swipe left or right. The current playlist is displayed. X Select Find. Specifying a new selection of images A keyboard is shown. New selection X Enter the name or part of the name of the X Select . track you are looking for.

Selecting a track from categories Setting image playback

X Select New selection. Switching from normal to thumbnail view X Select a category for playback. X Select Thumbnails.

Switching album cover display on and off Switching from thumbnail to normal view The album cover must be saved in the audio Select an image. file. X X Select Multimedia > Settings > Media > Display album cover. Displaying in full screen mode

X Select W > Full screen.

Viewing images Activating the controls in full screen

Useful information mode >> Using the smart Media-System. Images that have been saved to an SD card or X Tap the touchscreen. USB memory stick can be viewed in the smart Media-System. Switching from full screen mode to nor- The following file formats can be displayed: mal view R.JPG X Select W > Normal view. R.GIF R.PNG Enlarging the image R.BMP X Select W > Zoom in.

Image playback Showing images as a slide show

Starting image playback X Select W > Slide show.

X Insert an SD card or USB memory stick into the corresponding port. Setting the display duration X Select Multimedia > Pictures. X Select W > Picture settings > Slide X Select USB or SD as the media source. show delay. X Select a folder. X Set the desired time using the controls. X Select an image. Setting default view for image playback

X Select W > Image settings > Default view. X Select Normal view or Full screen.

Z 130 Using TomTom Services

Video playback Please take note of the following information when using data services: Video playback RThe mobile connectivity and built-in SIM card for this vehicle can only be used for Starting video playback data services. These are offered by certain Insert an SD card or connect a USB stick. third parties as well as Daimler AG. Usage X occurs via the smart Media-System in the X Select Multimedia > Video. vehicle. The use of data services requires X Select USB or SD. the conclusion of separate agreements X Select a folder or video. between the vehicle user and the respec- All videos in a folder are played one after tive provider. Voice service usage is not the other. permitted. As such, the SIM card must be permanently installed in the condition in i The size of the video file may have an which it was delivered. impact on the performance of the system. RThe mobile communications connectivity Therefore, only playback videos with a and the SIM card may only be used respon- length of up to five minutes. sibly in accordance with the applicable laws and other legal requirements of the Selecting the next or previous video corresponding countries. Provided that this is within the power of the vehicle user. Select D or C. X RUpgrading, reproduction, reverse assem- bly and disassembly of the SIM card are Stopping and continuing playback not permitted. Statutory authority remains unaffected. X Select Ë. Failure to follow the above instructions can, >> Using the smart Media-System. in some cases, lead to temporary or perma- Playing a new video nent deactivation of the mobile connection and the SIM card. This depends on the X Select New selection. severity of non-observance. The measure X Select a new video. described here contributes in particular to the protection of Daimler AG and its contrac- tual partners from negative legal conse- quences due to non-observance. The availa- Setting the video view bility of mobile connectivity in individual countries depends on the existence of corre- Playing videos in full screen mode sponding mobile service agreements with local mobile network providers. Availability X Select Full screen. can therefore change from time to time. The maximum period of validity for the mobile Setting the default view for video play- connectivity is 15 years from the time of back installation in the vehicle.

X Select W > Video settings. X Select Normal view or Full screen. Useful information In the TomTom Services menu, traffic infor- mation and other TomTom Services can be Using TomTom Services called up and managed. Please note The smart Media-System uses a mobile phone connection for data connection. Using TomTom Services 131

TomTom Live Services are available for a Starting TomTom Services subscription fee. The following TomTom Services come pre-installed and, following X Select Navigation > TomTom Services. activation, can be used free of charge for a period of three years: RHD Traffic Checking subscription status for Tom- RRadar cameras (not available in all coun- Tom Services tries) The services available on the device and RWeather their subscription status may be checked at RTomTom Places any time. More information on services X Select Services > TomTom Services > My http://www.tomtom.com/services. services. More information on availability in specific The services available on the device and countries: http://smart.com/connect their subscription status will be shown. TomTom Services can also be called up and Subscription to a service can be extended via managed in the Services menu. In the main http://www.tomtom.com, subject to a fee. menu, select Services > TomTom Services. This requires registration at http:// i If you have subscribed to the "TomTom tomtom.com/forsmart. Traffic" service and this is available, the X Remove the SD card from the vehicle and "Traffic info" menu will be called "TomTom insert it into a computer. Traffic". Further information: http://tomtom.com/ forsmart.

Activating TomTom Services >> Using the smart Media-System. TomTom Services must be activated in the Downloading updates and POIs smart Media-System before using them for If available, map and software updates as the first time. If TomTom Services are not yet well as points of interest may be downloaded activated, a corresponding button will be via http://www.tomtom.com. This requires displayed in the main menu and in the Serv‐ registration at http://tomtom.com/forsmart. ices menu. Remove the SD card from the vehicle and To activate TomTom Services for the first X insert it into a computer. time, observe the following requirements: Further information: http://tomtom.com/ Ran SD card with map data is inserted into forsmart. the SD card slot Ra valid vehicle position is available on the map Calling up Applications manager Ra mobile phone network is available Information on smartphone screen applica- X Select Services > Activate My Services. tions and smartphone voice-operated con- X Confirm the display messages with Yes. trol can be called up with the Applications After a short while, TomTom Services are manager. available. X Select Services > Settings > Applica‐ X Select Services > TomTom Services. The TomTom Services installed on the tions manager. device are displayed. X Select the desired TomTom service. A display message appears. TomTom Serv- Calling up the connectivity manager ices are activated. The connectivity manager allows you to manage the devices connected to the smart Media-System.

Z 132 Using the navigation system

X Select Services > Settings > Connectiv‐ you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a ity manager. risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be Managing data sharing sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- Please note tion to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle If data sharing is approved, smartphone stationary. screen applications, for example Android Auto™, smartphone voice-operated control The navigation system does not provide and the online charging station search are information on stop signs, right of way signs, activated alongside TomTom Services. traffic regulations or road safety regula- tions. Enabling or disabling data sharing The traffic regulations always take prece- If data sharing has not been enabled before- dence over navigation announcements. hand, a corresponding message is shown Observe the legal stipulations and traffic when the smart Media-System is started up. regulations of the country you are driving in Data sharing can be enabled or disabled at when in navigation mode. any time. X Select Services > Settings > Data shar‐ Selecting the navigation system ing. X Select Menu > Navigation. X Select one of the following settings: The following functions can be carried out: RYes R >> Using the smart Media-System. searching for a destination Enable data sharing Rplanning a route RNo Rdisplaying a map Disable data sharing. Rcalling up TomTom Services Rchanging navigation settings Displaying additional information

X Select Services > Settings > Data sharing Installing map data > About. G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swal- Displaying text in another language lowed and cause choking. This poses an X Select Services > Settings > Data sharing increased risk of injury or even fatal > Language. injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of chil- dren. If a SD card is swallowed, seek med- Using the navigation system ical attention immediately. Starting the navigation system ! To prevent damage to data, only use the Please note SD card provided for the data in the Media- System or for updating map and systems files. G WARNING If you operate information and communi- X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in the centre console. cation equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from X Switch on the device. The map data is read by the navigation the traffic situation. This could also cause system. Using the navigation system 133

Removing an SD card Displaying information about the desti- nation address X Select Menu > System > Remove SD-card. X Confirm the display message with Yes. This function can be called up when entering the destination. X Press the SD card. X Remove the SD card from the slot. X Select W > Show info.

Updating map data Entering a destination using the map Regular updates will be offered for the map A location on the map can be selected as the data. The first update can be downloaded for destination. free in the web portal within 90 days of vehi- X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point cle activation. This requires registration at on map. http://tomtom.com/forsmart. Further infor- Align the map view with the destination. mation is available from any smart centre. X X Tap the destination point on the display. X Remove the SD card from the vehicle and The symbol selected is highlighted in blue. insert it into a computer. X Tap on the symbol to confirm. X Install update software on the computer. Run the map update assistant. X Entering a destination using the voice i As well as updates, the latest software for control system the Media-System can be downloaded and Premium Voices by TomTom can be pur- X Press the button on the multifunction chased. steering wheel. A tone sounds. >> Using the smart Media-System. X Say the command "Enter address". Entering and managing destinations X When prompted by the voice control sys- tem, say the destination address, includ- Entering a destination by address ing street name, house number and city. Say the voice command "Yes" or, if several X When using the navigation system for the X first time, enter the country. possible destinations are displayed, say the number. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Address. Selecting a destination from the list of X If desired, change the country using the flag symbol. previous destinations Enter the town or postcode. X X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Recent X Select the destination from the list. destinations. X Select the street. X Select the destination. X Select the house number. X Confirm with Done. Entering a destination using geo-coor- dinates Searching for a car park near the desti- X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Lati‐ nation address tude Longitude. This function can be called up when entering X Enter the longitude and latitude. the destination. X Select W > Nearby car park. A list of car parks near the current desti- nation appears.

Z 134 Using the navigation system

Setting a home location maximum of 24 charging stations can be checked. Select Navigation > Settings > Set home X Five minutes after the check, the marking location. i automatically changes from green to grey. X Enter a home address. X Select a charging station. Setting home as a destination Entering a point of interest Select Navigation > Drive to... > Home. X POIs such as museums, restaurants or car parks near a location are displayed on the Selecting a saved location as a destina- map. tion X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point At least one destination must be stored for of interest. this function. The following list of surrounding areas appears. A POI can be searched for in these X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Saved areas: locations. RNear my location Select the destination. X RAlong route RNear destination Managing saved locations RNear Home X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage RIn city saved locations. X Select the surrounding area in which to search for a POI.

>> Using the smart Media-System. The following list of categories for POIs Entering a charging station as a desti- appears: nation Rlist of categories for POIs: e.g. charging X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Charg‐ station or restaurant ing stations. RPOI name search The following list of locations appears in RPOI search within a category which a charging station can be searched Select the category for the search. for: X X Select a POI. RNear my location RAlong route i If the charging station category is selec- RNear destination ted, only charging stations from the map data are searched. Charging stations that RNear Home can be checked for charging point availa- RIn city bility are not taken into account. X Select the location for the charging station search. A list of the corresponding charging sta- Managing POIs tions appears. There is an automatic check whether a charging point is free on these Adding a POI category charging stations. The check may take X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage several minutes. When the check is fin- POIs > Add POI category. ished, a message appears. If a charging X Enter the name and symbol for the new POI station has a charging point which is not category. being used, it will be marked green. If no charging point is free, or no information is Deleting a POI category available, the charging station is marked Delete Navigation > Settings > Manage grey. Charging stations from the map data X which cannot be checked are not marked. A POIs > Delete POI category. X Select the category to be deleted. Using the navigation system 135

Adding POIs Changing the route X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Add POI. Useful information If no POI categories have been defined yet, Once the destination has been selected, the a prompt appears to enter a POI category. navigation system calculates the route to the X Select the category for the POI. destination. The following options are avail- X Enter your POI. able for adjusting route guidance: Rcalculate alternative routes Having POIs displayed on map Radjust routes calculated by the navigation This function enables the display of person- system alised POIs on the map. Rplan routes in advance and travel via spe- X Select Navigation > Settings > Show POI cific way points on map. Radjust settings for calculating routes Deleting POIs Once the route is calculated, a route sum- mary is shown. By default, the quickest route X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage will be calculated for route planning, taking POIs > Delete POI. into account IQ Routes™. Traffic information X Select a POI category. is taken into account when calculating the route. X Select the POI to be deleted. Depending on the remaining range, sections Editing POIs of the route receive the following colours: X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage Rgreen: remaining range is expected to be POIs > Edit POI. sufficient for the route. >> Using the smart Media-System. X Select a POI category. Rorange: this route may or may not be able X Customise the POI properties. to be completed depending on the driving style and the influence of external factors. Setting alerts for a nearby POI Rred: remaining range is not expected to be sufficient for the route. X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Warning when near POI. The "route overview" function allows you to Select a POI category. set whether the summary of a calculated X route is automatically faded out from the X Set the distance at which the message display after ten seconds. should appear. If the route is not confirmed with Done, the X Set the type of alert issued. view switches after approximately ten sec- onds automatically to the map view. Entering a destination via the TomTom LIVE service "TomTom Places" Displaying a planned route

POIs from the "TomTom Places" online data- Calculating the route base are available using the "TomTom Pla- ces" function. X Enter a destination. Select Done. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > TomTom X Places. The route is displayed. If the remaining A list of search criteria appears which can range is not expected to be sufficient to be used to search for a POI. reach the destination, a prompt will appear asking whether a charging station X Select the search criterion. should be added to the route. X Enter a search term. If a large number of search results are available, 20 additional search results can be downloaded.

Z 136 Using the navigation system

Displaying the route details X Select Navigation > Change route > Select W > Route details. Travel via. X If a way point has already been entered, a X Select one of the following functions: list of the saved way points will be dis- RShow instructions played. An overview of the route with directions X Select Add. appears. X Select a new way point from Address, RShow map of route Recent destinations, Saved locations, The route appears on a map. TomTom Places or Point of interest. RShow destination The new way point is added. The destination for the route appears. By pressing W, it is possible to search Avoiding road blocks for a car park near the destination or add The route can be changed if a section of road the location to the saved locations. along the route is blocked or there is a traffic RShow traffic on route jam. Traffic disruptions along the route are X Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid shown. roadblock. RSummary X Select the length of the route that needs to A summary of the route details appears. be avoided. Avoiding specific roads Saving a planned route The route is calculated to avoid specific roads. X Select W > Save Itinerary . Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid >> Using the smart Media-System. X part of route. Changing the route A list of the roads on the route is displayed. Cancelling the route X Select the street that you wish to avoid. X Select Navigation > Change route > Can‐ Taking traffic disruptions into account cel route. When a new destination is entered, route The route is recalculated based on current guidance can be resumed again. traffic information. Traffic information is not available in all Calculating an alternative route countries and regions. X Select Navigation > Change route > Cal‐ X Select Navigation > Change route > Mini‐ culate alternative. mise delays. A new route is calculated and displayed An overview of the traffic disruptions that takes you on different roads. along the route will be shown. X Select the alternative route or a previous X Select the traffic disruption you wish to one. avoid.

Route guidance via way point Planning a route in advance The route can be adjusted by entering up to four way points. Adding a route X Select Navigation > Itineraries. X Select Add. X Select the starting point of the route. X Enter the route destination. X Enter at least one way point for the route. Using the navigation system 137

X Enter the route name. Selecting the setting for carpool lanes X Confirm with Done. Carpool lanes are lanes which can only be used by vehicles with at least two occupants. Starting navigation using a saved route X Select Navigation > Settings > Route X Select Navigation > Itineraries. planning > Carpool lane settings. X Select the desired route. X Select one of the following settings: X Select W > Start. RAsk for carpool lanes on my route RAlways avoid carpool lanes Setting route planning RNever avoid carpool lanes

Selecting route types X Select Navigation > Settings > Route Using information during route guid- planning > Route types. ance X Select one of the following settings: RAsk for every route Useful information RAlways plan the fastest route Navigation announcements provide guid- RAlways plan eco routes ance during the journey without distracting RAlways avoid motorways you from traffic conditions. In addition, the RAlways plan the shortest route display shows information about the route.

Selecting the setting for toll roads Switching navigation announcements on X Select Navigation > Settings > Route and off

planning > Toll roads. >> Using the smart Media-System. X Tap on the area of the next navigation X Select one of the following settings: manoeuvre during route guidance. R Ask for toll roads on route X Select Turn on voice guidance or Turn RAlways avoid toll roads off voice guidance. RDo not avoid toll roads Information such as traffic reports and warnings will be played even if the naviga- Selecting the setting for ferry connections tion announcements have been deactivated. X Select Navigation > Settings > Route During route guidance, traffic information planning > Ferry connections. can be shown for the route ahead. The fol- X Select one of the following settings: lowing traffic information can be received: RAsk for ferries on my route RTraffic announcements (RDS/TMC) RAlways avoid ferries RHD Traffic (a TomTom Live service) RDo not avoid ferries i HD Traffic Information takes precedence. i Route planning treats the Eurotunnel as a ferry connection. Live services are not available in all coun- tries and regions. Further information: Selecting the setting for unpaved roads http://tomtom.com/services X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Unpaved roads. X Select one of the following settings: RAsk for unpaved roads on my route RAlways avoid unpaved roads

Z 138 Using the navigation system

Tracking navigation on the display the exit. Lane Keeping Assist is not available for all junctions in all countries.

Traffic information details

: Zoom in and out of the map view : Overall delay on route ; Maximum permitted speed ; Traffic disruption (packed snow) = Name of the next main road or informa- tion about the next street sign = Traffic disruption (rain) Traffic disruption (traffic jam) ? Traffic information ? Current location and distance to next A Route information A traffic disruption Warning for remaining range to destina- tion During route guidance, traffic information is B Compass and symbol for two or three- shown for the route ahead. When there are a dimensional map display number of traffic disruptions in quick suc- cession, only the very next disruption on the C Context menu >> Using the smart Media-System. route will be displayed. D Next navigation manoeuvre with dis- tance and symbol for volume adjustment Traffic information is not available in all countries and regions. E Information about current radio or audio equipment Colour Meaning X Tap on an area or on a symbol in the map Grey Unknown or unexplained situa- display: tion RMap: to switch to the overview map Orange Slow-moving traffic R:: to zoom in and out of the map view R?: to show traffic reports on the route Red Traffic jam RA: to display the route details Dark Standstill or road blocked RB: to switch between two or three-dimen- red sional map display RC: to open the context menu Calling up more detailed information RD: to repeat the navigation message, about the traffic problems change the volume of navigation announcements or switch off X Tap on the display for traffic information RE: to switch to the corresponding radio, during route guidance. multimedia or telephone menu The navigation system zooms in on the map Scrolling through the traffic reports view as the vehicle approaches a junction. This makes it possible to follow turning X Tap on the message on the touchscreen and manoeuvres more accurately. swipe left or right. Shortly before navigating a motorway junc- tion or exit, the display will show a three- dimensional representation of the lanes and Using the navigation system 139

Displaying the overview map RTraffic information RNames Useful information RPoints of interest (POIs) With the "View map" function, the display RSatellite images shows a slidable, two-dimensional overview RCoordinates map. The map shows your current position, as well as a number of other elements, such as favourites. Using TomTom Services with the navi- gation system Displaying a map Displaying traffic information along the X Select Navigation > View map. A map of the surrounding area will be route shown. X Tap on the area of traffic information dur- X To search: select W > Find. ing route guidance. X Swipe left or right to switch between traf- Controlling the map view fic information.

Moving the map Adjusting the route according to traffic X Tap on the centre of the touchscreen. disruptions X Swipe in the desired direction. The map Select Navigation > TomTom Services > will then move in the respective direction. X Traffic > Minimise delays. A faster route that had been previously Zooming in on the map rejected or route which may not have been >> Using the smart Media-System. X Place two fingers slightly apart in the taken into account due to the Never middle of the touchscreen. change my route setting for the traffic X Move your fingers away from each other. information is selected. Reducing the scale of the map Displaying traffic disruptions on the X Place two fingers at a greater distance overview map apart on the screen. Do not place your fin- gers at the very top area or very bottom X Select W > View map during route guid- area of the display. ance. X Pull your fingers towards each other. Traffic disruptions are displayed as sym- bols on the overview map. Large area traf- fic disruptions such as rain, fog or snow Displaying the reachability map are displayed with several symbols. If no route is planned, a reachability map can X To view detailed information, tap on a traf- be displayed in order to roughly gauge the fic disruption symbol. range with the current charge status. The following symbols are used: Select Navigation > View map. X Symbol Meaning X Select W > View reachability map. Traffic jam Showing and hiding additional informa- tion on the map Road blocked

X Select Navigation > View map. Traffic disruption X Select W > Change map information. X Select one of the following pieces of infor- Construction site mation:

Z 140 Using the navigation system

Symbol Meaning The navigation system will not change the route, even if a traffic announcement One or more lanes blocked has been made.

Accident Setting the navigation system Traffic disruption avoided using the traffic information Setting the voice Fog The voice used for navigation messages can be changed. It is possible to choose between Wind computer-generated voices or voices recor- ded by professionals. For voices that have been recorded by professionals, only basic Snow navigation messages will be spoken. Black ice X Select System > Sound > Voice. X Select the voice for playback. Rain X To listen to the voice, select Test.

Setting the voice output i Large area traffic disruptions such as rain, fog or snow are displayed on the The read-aloud function is only available in overview map with several symbols. a computer-generated voice. X Select System > Sound > Voice output

>> Using the smart Media-System. Viewing traffic information for the route settings. to work X Select one of the following settings: RRead early warning instructions X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Traffic info. for route to RRead aloud motorway lane instruc‐ work. tions R X Select one of the following settings: Read aloud traffic info when navi‐ gating RHome to work RRead aloud foreign street names RWork to home RRead aloud road numbers RChange the home to work route RRead aloud street names RRead aloud weather information Selecting the settings for traffic infor- mation RRead aloud POI warnings RRead aloud warnings X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > RRead aloud signposts Traffic > Traffic info. settings. X Select one of the following settings: Changing the map RAlways change to this route If a faster route has been calculated due X Select Navigation > Settings > Switch to a traffic report, the navigation system map. automatically changes the route. X Select the desired map. RRequest confirmation for route If a faster route has been calculated due to a traffic report, the navigation system will ask which route should be used. RNever change my route Using the navigation system 141

Changing the map colours Setting the units of measurement for dis- tance X Select Navigation > Settings > Change map colours. All units of measurement for distance in the X Press , or . to select the desired navigation system can be changed. The units display. of measurement for distance of other dis- plays are not changed, such as distance dis- plays for the eco score or the on-board com- Changing the E-vehicle settings puter.

X Select Navigation > Settings > E-vehicle X Select System > Set units > Distance settings. units. The following functions can be called up: X Select one of the following settings: Rdeactivating or activating the battery RKilometres warning RMiles When the charge status of the high- voltage battery has reached 20% and the battery warning is activated, a display Setting the units for GPS coordinates message appears. X Select System > Set units > GPS coordi‐ Rshowing or hiding charging stations on nate display. the map X Select one of the following settings: Rmanaging charging stations RDegrees (d°) Rselecting the charging cable RDegrees, Minutes (d° m.m') The settings for both the type of charging RDegrees, Minutes, Seconds (d° m' and charging cable are used by the naviga- s'') tion system to refine the selection of avail- >> Using the smart Media-System. able charging stations. During navigation, the following options can be selected via the W context menu: Rsearch for type of charging Rsearch for electricity provider Rdisplay all charging stations A display message appears if there is some incompatibility between the defined set- tings and a selected charging station.

Setting safety warnings

X Select System > Safety warnings. X Select the desired settings: RSuggest driving breaks RWarn when driving near schools RWarn when driving faster than allowed RWarn when driving faster than a set speed X Select Resume. X Select a warning tone for the respective safety warning. For the "Warn when driving faster than a set speed" function, the speed above which the warning tone should sound must be entered.

Z 142 Using smart "ready to" services

Online access to the vehicle A valid e-mail address or mobile phone number is necessary for registration and the terms of use must be accepted. G WARNING RThe vehicle must be linked with a personal If you operate information and communi- "smart portal" account at a smart centre. cation equipment integrated in the vehicle Verification and presentation of the vehi- when driving, you could be distracted from cle registration document are required to the traffic situation. This could also cause link the vehicle. The vehicle identification you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a number (VIN) is also required. risk of an accident. RThe desired functions must be activated after linking the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the For activation, the "smart control" terms of traffic situation permits. If you cannot be use for both the remote query and remote sure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten- configuration must be accepted via the tion to road and traffic conditions and "smart portal". The portal address is sup- operate the equipment with the vehicle plied by the smart centre. stationary. RThe vehicle must be connected to the Internet. G WARNING Connection is made possible via the mobile communications module integrated in the If you use mobile information systems and vehicle. communications devices while driving, Once these requirements are fulfilled, the you will be distracted from traffic condi- following functions, for example, may be tions. You could then lose control of the used: vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. RCalling up the current locking status of the Only operate these devices when the vehi- vehicle. cle is stationary. RCalling up information on the distance >> Using online offerings. before the next recommended service or if Observe the legal requirements for the coun- a service is already due. try in which you are currently driving. RCalling up the current vehicle position in You can use "smart control" to access remote the range of approx. 1.5 km around the query and to configure your vehicle vehicle. remotely. It can be accessed from computers During the charging process, additional dis- and smartphones. The Internet address is plays can be called up such as the predicted available from any smart centre. It is also time until charging is completed or the possible to call up "smart control" via the charging capacity. smart website. If there is a delay in the synchronisation of Access to "smart control" is free of charge for data via the mobile phone network, the dis- the first three years commencing from hand- plays in the vehicle and at "smart control" over of the new vehicle, subject to the avail- may temporarily differ from each other. ability of the service. Thereafter you can continue to subscribe to use the "smart con- Further information on "smart control" is trol" service. available at any smart centre and via www.smart.com/smartcontrol. The availability and features of "smart con- trol" may vary from country to country. Requirements for the use of "smart control": Using smart "ready to" services RRegistration on the "smart portal" Internet page via smart.com/portal. Useful information smart "ready to" services are only available in certain countries. Using smart "ready to" services 143

The functions are enabled via a communica- tion module and the smart "ready to" app. Information as well as the Internet addresses for the smart "ready to" services are availa- ble at any smart centre. i If you are already using a smart "ready to" service, additional services can be activated with your user details in the usual web portal or via the app. The communication module and activation are required in order to use the smart "ready to" services: RRegister on the "ready to" web portal. A valid e-mail address and the vehicle identification number (VIN) are necessary for registration, and the conditions of use must be accepted. RInstall the "ready to" app on your smart- phone and create a user account.

Using the Key Card Holder >> Using online offerings.

Key Card Holder : is fitted in the glove com- partment and is intended for the storage and inventory of the vehicle key and up to two cards (e.g. fuel card, parking card or car wash card). The inventory is available within certain smart "ready to" services. For an inventory, the key and/or the cards must be equipped with an RFID tag.

Z 144 Stowing small objects

Stowing small objects ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The Please note drinks could otherwise spill.

G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in Using the compartments an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occu- pants. Additionally, the cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot restrain the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, especially in the event of braking or sudden changes in direction. RAlways stow objects so they cannot be thrown around in these or similar situa- tions.

RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- X To stow objects, use suitable stowage trude over the top of stowage compart- spaces. ments or stowage nets. The following stowage spaces are availa- ble: RAll closable stowage compartments should be closed before beginning your R: Stowage compartments in the doors journey. R; Cup holder in the front centre console RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, R= Glove compartment pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or R? Stowage net in the front-passenger objects which are too large behind the footwell last bench seat or under the passenger RA Sliding drawer in the centre console

>> Loading and stowing. seats. RB smart EQ fortwo: spectacles compart- ment above the driver's seat and above the front-passenger seat G WARNING RVelcro strip on the front passenger seat The cup holder cannot secure a drinks con- for stowing a handbag tainer in place during a journey. If you use RCup holder in the rear centre console a cup holder during a journey, the drinks with a recess for storing a mobile phone container could be flung around and liquid Rsmart EQ fortwo: stowage compartment could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could in the lower tailgate come into contact with the liquid and, in RStowage net with two separate compart- particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You ments on the back of the boot separator could be distracted from the traffic situa- tion and lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only place containers of a suit- able size in the cup holder. Seal the con- tainer, in particular when it contains hot liquid. Stowing luggage and large objects 145

Locking/unlocking the glove compart- Stowing luggage and large objects ment Please note

G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occu- pants. Additionally, the cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot restrain the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, especially in the event of braking or sudden changes in direction. X Insert the key into the lock. RAlways stow objects so they cannot be X To lock: turn the key to position 2. thrown around in these or similar situa- X To unlock: turn the key to position 1. tions. RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- trude over the top of stowage compart- Opening the stowage compartment in ments or ruffled pockets. the tailgate (smart fortwo coupé) RAll closable stowage compartments ! Do not exceed the lower tailgate maxi- should be closed before beginning your mum load of 100 kg. It may otherwise journey. become damaged. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or objects which are too large behind the last bench seat or under the passenger

seats. >> Loading and stowing.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehi- cle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. Observe the following loading guidelines when loading and transporting luggage and loads: Open the tailgate. Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible X gross vehicle weight or the permissible X Pull handle : on the inside of the lower axle loads for the vehicle (including occu- tailgate upwards. pants) Lift up the cover in the direction of the X Rthe load must not protrude above the upper arrow. edge of the head restraints Rensure that no items of luggage can enter the passenger compartment above or between the seats Rensure that loaded objects are stowed safely and are secured Rload heavy objects at the bottom and light objects at the top

Z 146 Stowing luggage and large objects

Rthe load compartment is the preferred Opening the boot (smart fortwo cabrio) place to stow objects Rstow heavy loads as far forwards and as Opening the tailgate low down in the load compartment as pos- sible

Opening the load compartment (smart fortwo coupé) ! The tailgates swing to the rear, both upwards and downwards, when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is suffi- cient clearance above, behind and below the tailgates.

X Press the é button on the key. X Press the % button on the key. X Fold the upper tailgate upwards. X Press button : in the handle recess. X Fold down the tailgate.

Opening the rear soft top

>> Loading and stowing. X Pull lever : upwards. X Fold the lower tailgate down.

Closing the boot (smart fortwo coupé) X Open the tailgate. X Press both latch levers :. Fold the lower tailgate upwards and X Swing the rear soft top up. engage on both sides. X X Pull the upper tailgate down and press it closed. Closing the boot (smart fortwo cabrio) X Press the & button on the key. The vehicle is locked. Closing the rear soft top ! When closing the tailgate, you must first lock the tail cover. Otherwise, you could break the catch lever.

X Pull the rear soft top down until it engages. X Lock the rear soft top with both latch lev- ers. Using the boot separator 147

Closing the tailgate Folding back the seat backrest X Pull the tailgate up until it engages. Please note X Press the & button on the key. The vehicle is locked. G WARNING If the seat backrest is not engaged, it may fold forwards, e.g. during braking or in the Enlarging the load compartment: fold- event of an accident. ing the seat backrest forwards RAs a result, a backrest which is not Folding the seat backrest forwards (using engaged would press you into the seat the lever) belt. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function and could additionally cause injury. RThe backrest cannot restrain objects or loads in the boot. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every journey, make sure that the backrest is engaged as described.

Folding back the seat backrest (using the lever)

Seat with a lever X Pull lever :. X Lift lever ; and slide the front-passenger X Push the seat backrest back at the same seat to its rearmost position. time until it engages. X Pull lever : forwards. X Fold the seat backrest forwards at the same Folding back the seat backrest (using the time. handwheel) >> Loading and stowing.

X Turn handwheel : backwards. Folding the seat backrest forwards (using the handwheel) Using the boot separator Fitting the boot separator

G WARNING On its own, the boot cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Seat with a handwheel Always store objects so that they cannot be Turn handwheel : forward. X flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g.

Z 148 Removing/fitting the charging cable bag

by using lashing material, even if you are Hooking and unhooking the boot sep- using the boot cover. arator

For easier fitting, fold the front-passenger X Grip boot separator : in the middle and seat backrest forwards. pull it back. X Hook boot separator into left and right rear X smart fortwo coupé: open the upper and lower tailgate. brackets A. X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tail- gate. Removing/fitting the charging cable X smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft top up. bag X Hold boot separator : with the luggage net bag in the direction of the passenger Removing the charging cable bag compartment in the boot. X Insert boot separator : into bracket ; on the right side. >> Loading and stowing.

X Turn both buttons : to the left. The buttons are released from the anchor- age. Fold the charging cable bag to the left. Slide handle to the right and hold. X X ? The Velcro fasteners under the charging X Insert boot separator : into bracket ; on cable bag are detached. the left side. X Remove snap hook ;. X Release handle ?. Boot separator : snaps into place. X Secure the luggage net bag with the Velcro fasteners. If boot separator : is not required and no subwoofer is installed, it can be attached to brackets =. Removing/fitting the charging cable bag 149

Installing the charging cable bag

X Place the charging cable bag with its side resting on the engine compartment cover and then position it on the side trim. X Position the charging cable bag in a ver- tical position. Take hold of the Velcro fasteners beneath the charging cable bag. X Push both buttons : into the anchorage and turn them to the right. X Secure snap hook ;. >> Loading and stowing.

Z 150 Opening and closing the service cover

Useful information X Insert the connector. X Place the subwoofer at the base of the side The engine compartment in the smart is trim. located at the rear, below the boot. Service X Turn quick-release fastener : upwards. fluid reservoirs are located under the service X Press the bracket into the recess in side cover at the front. trim ;. When working on the vehicle, always comply X Turn quick-release fastener : to the with all safety regulations. Always have right. work in the engine compartment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Opening and closing the service cover Removing/fitting the subwoofer Please note Removing the subwoofer G WARNING If the service cover is not locked, it may come loose during driving and block your view or endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, make sure that the service cover is locked before driving off.

G WARNING If the windscreen wipers start to move when the service cover is open, you could become caught up in the wiper rods. There X Release quick-release fastener : in the direction of the arrow. is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers X Reach into the recess on the quick-release fastener. and the ignition before you open the ser- X Detach, tilt and pull the subwoofer to the vice cover. >> Maintenance and care. right. To ensure unhindered air intake, com- X Pull out the connector. ! pletely remove any dirt or snow from the ventilation slots above the service cover. Fitting the subwoofer The vehicle must be secured against rolling away. On vehicles with a lockable service cover, the service cover must be unlocked before it is opened. Opening and closing the service cover 151

Unlocking the service cover Closing the service cover

X Insert the tip of the key into the opening of X Lift service cover =. lock cover :. X Slide bars A on the left and right of the X Press the key to the right ; to lever up the service cover under the bars on wing ?. lock cover. X Remove the lock cover. X Insert the key into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise.

Opening the service cover

X Press service cover = downwards. X Press both levers ; backwards in the direction of the arrow. >> Maintenance and care.

Locking the service cover

X Pull both levers ; in the direction of the arrow. X Lift service cover = at the front. X Pull service cover = slightly forwards and lift upwards. X Carefully rest service cover =, still attached to the straps, against the front of the vehicle.

X Insert the key into the lock and turn it to position 1. X Insert lock cover : on the driver's side and snap it into place.

Z 152 Checking service products and topping up

Checking service products and topping X Open the service cover. up X Check reservoir ; visually. The fluid level must be between the MIN Please note mark and the MAX mark. WARNING G Topping up the coolant Service product can be poisonous and haz- ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. G WARNING Observe the instructions on the respective The cooling system is pressurised when original container when using, storing and the drive system is at normal operating disposing off service products. Always temperature. When you open the cap, you store service products in the sealed origi- could be scalded by hot coolant spraying nal container. Always keep service prod- out. There is a risk of injury. ucts out of the reach of children. Let the drive system cool down before you open the cap. Wear protective gloves and H Environmental note eye protection when opening. Open the cap Dispose of service products in an environ- slowly to relieve pressure. mentally-responsible manner. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed Also observe the information in the "Service with the desired antifreeze protection. You products" section (Y page 204). could otherwise damage the engine. Service products include the following: Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications RCoolant for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on RBrake fluid the Internet at RWindscreen washer fluid http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con- RClimate control system refrigerant tact a qualified specialist workshop. Service products approved for smart: If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approx- imately 130 †.

>> Maintenance and care. Checking the coolant and topping up The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concen- tration in the engine cooling system should Checking the coolant level be 50% (antifreeze protection down to -37 †). This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -25 †. X Cover cap : of coolant expansion tank ; with a cloth. X Turn the cap slowly one half turn. If nec- essary, allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn the cap further and remove it. X Top up the coolant to the MAX level. X Replace the cap and tighten it as far as it will go. X Close the service cover. X Stop the vehicle on a level surface. X Let the coolant cool down for at least i See "Technical data" for information on 30 minutes. recommended coolants. Checking wheels and tyres 153

Topping up the washer fluid G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation WARNING G pressure loss. As a result, you could lose Windscreen washer concentrate is highly control of your vehicle. There is a risk of flammable. If it comes into contact with hot accident. components in the front compartment, it Check the tyres regularly for signs of dam- may ignite. There is a risk of fire and age and replace any damaged tyres imme- injury. diately. Make sure that windscreen washer con- centrate is not spilled next to the filler WARNING neck. G Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dis- sipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increa- ses, in particular where speed is not adap- ted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across X Open the service cover. the entire width of all tyres. X Pull cap : upwards at the tab. Minimum tyre tread depth for: X If available, pull the removable nozzle up as far as the stop. Rsummer tyres: 3 mm RM+S tyres: 4 mm X Top up with washer fluid. X If available, push the removable nozzle For safety reasons, replace the tyres before down and push it inside. the legally prescribed limit for the mini-

X Replace and tightly screw on cap :. mum tyre tread depth is reached. >> Maintenance and care. X Close the service cover. ! If you cannot avoid driving over obsta- i See "Technical data" for information on cles, e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at an windscreen washer fluid and antifreeze. obtuse angle only. You could otherwise damage the wheel rims and tyres. Modification work on the brake system and Checking wheels and tyres wheels is not permitted. The use of spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This Warning invalidates the general operating permit for G the vehicle. A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, Check the wheels and tyres for damage at steering and braking characteristics of the least once a month, as well as after driving vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. off-road or on poorly surfaced roads. Do not drive with a flat tyre. Immediately Run-in new tyres at moderate speeds for the replace the flat tyre with your spare wheel, first 100 km. The tyres only attain their max- or consult a qualified specialist workshop. imum performance after this distance. Vibrations, audible noises and unusual han- dling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side, can indicate damage to wheels or tyres.

Z 154 Changing a wheel

If you suspect a tyre defect: When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the X Reduce vehicle speed. correct: X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Rdesignation X Check the wheels and tyres for damage. If you find no signs of damage, have the Rmanufacturer wheels and tyres checked at a specialist Rtype workshop. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are loca- ted in the wheel. Changing a wheel Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in Please note the area of the valve, since this could dam- age the electronic components. G WARNING Only have tyres changed at a qualified Interchanging the front and rear wheels specialist workshop. may severely impair the driving charac- ! Position a suitable jack only on the jack- teristics if the wheels or tyres have differ- ing points intended for this purpose. Raise ent dimensions. The wheel brakes or sus- the vehicle for a short time only to change pension components may also be damaged. the wheel. Make sure the vehicle is on a There is a risk of accident. suitable surface and that no-one is in the vehicle. Secure the vehicle using chocks Interchange front and rear wheels only if and apply the parking brake. the wheels and tyres are of the same Interchanging front and rear wheels or tires dimensions. of differing dimensions can render the gen- eral operating permit invalid. G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum Rules for selecting new tyres speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre ! For safety reasons, smart recommends bursting. There is a risk of accident. that you only use tyres and wheels which Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes have been specifically approved by smart

>> Maintenance and care. approved for your vehicle model. Observe for your vehicle. These are specially adap- the tyre load rating and speed rating ted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®. required for your vehicle. Only use tyres and wheels specifically tested and approved by smart. Certain G WARNING characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are noise emissions or fuel consumption, may used, the wheel brakes or suspension com- otherwise be adversely affected. In addi- ponents may be damaged. There is a risk of tion, when driving with a load, dimen- an accident. sional variations and different tyre defor- mation characteristics could cause the Always replace wheels and tyres with tyres to make contact with the bodywork those that fulfil the specifications of the and axle components. This could result in original part. damage to the tyres or the vehicle. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit smart accepts no liability for damage the correct: resulting from the use of tyres or wheels other than those tested and approved. Rdesignation Information on wheels and tyres can be Rtype obtained at a qualified specialist work- shop, e.g. a smart centre. Changing a wheel 155

The service life of tyres depends on various Removing a wheel factors, including the following: RDriving style G WARNING RTyre pressure If you do not position the jack correctly at RMileage the appropriate jacking point of the vehi- Observe the following rules for selecting new cle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle tyres: raised. There is a risk of injury. RObserve country-specific regulations Only position the jack at the appropriate which stipulate or recommend a certain jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the tyre type for the vehicle. jack must be positioned vertically, directly ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type under the jacking point of the vehicle. and make. ROnly tyres of the same size may be used on ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. a single axle (left/right). The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel ROnly use tyres of the same type (summer hubs could otherwise be damaged when tyres, all-season tyres, winter tyres). the bolts are tightened. RUse only wheel-tyre combinations ! Position a suitable jack only on the jack- approved by smart. ing points intended for this purpose. RDo not wear tyres out too much. This oth- Never position the jack on the high-volt- erwise significantly reduces the traction age battery. Do not jack up the vehicle on on wet roads (aquaplaning). the high-voltage battery. There is other- RReplace tyres after six years at the latest. wise a risk of damaging the high-voltage battery. i Recommended tyre pressures for various operating states can be found on the tyre Also observe the notes in the "Changing a pressure table on the driver's side door wheel" section. pillar (B-pillar). You can find further information regarding tyres and wheels at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops and at any smart centre. >> Maintenance and care. Preparing to change a wheel The vehicle tool tray is located under the glove compartment. X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. Warning stickers X Apply the parking brake. X Position the front wheels to point straight ahead. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Z 156 Changing a wheel

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: X Using both hands, grasp two hub cap openings and remove the hub cap.

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub cap cover: X Remove the hub cap cover.

X Position jack ; behind the triangular indentations for jacking point :.

X Set the foot of the jack up vertically with respect to the jacking point on the vehicle. X Raise the vehicle using the jack until the tyre is a maximum of 3 cm off the ground. X Using wheel wrench : loosen the wheel X Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts. bolts by about one turn. Do not unscrew the Remove the wheel. wheel bolts completely. X >> Maintenance and care.

Fitting a wheel

G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. The vehicle may only be raised at the desig- nated jacking points. These points ; are WARNING located in the front and the rear directly next G to the wheels. Do not position jack = on the If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts edge of sill :. Otherwise, damage to the when the vehicle is raised, the jack could vehicle could occur. tip over. There is a risk of injury. Using the tyre pressure monitor 157

Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to ?. The tightening torque must be when the vehicle is on the ground. 105 Nm. X Check the recommended tyre pressure and ! When changing a wheel, use only wheel adjust if necessary. bolts that have been approved for the i Vehicles with tyre pressure control sys- wheel rim and vehicle. tem: all fitted wheels must be equipped Always pay attention to the instructions and with functioning sensors. safety notices in "Changing a wheel" (Y page 154).

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: X Fit hub cap A such that valve B does not Fit tyres with a specified direction of rota- become trapped. tion only according to their direction of rota- X Press the hub cap evenly onto the wheel tion. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre with both hands until you hear the hub cap indicates its correct direction of rotation. engage. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact X Check to make sure the hub cap is seated surfaces. securely on the wheel. X Push the wheel onto the wheel hub and Vehicle with steel wheels and wheel hub cov- press it on. ers: X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them Fit the hub cap cover. slightly. X >> Maintenance and care. Storing wheels

X Store wheels in a cool, dry and dark place when not in use. X Protect against oil, grease and fuel.

Using the tyre pressure monitor Useful information

Lower the vehicle all the way. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre X pressure to the recommended cold tyre pres- X Remove the jack. sure suitable for the operating situation. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- The tyre pressure monitor issues a warning wise pattern in sequence indicated : when the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor works properly only if sensors are present in all four tyres,

Z 158 Checking the tyre pressures

and after the monitor has learned the correct If the Tyre pressure monitor restarted tyre pressure for the current operating sit- message does not appear after five seconds, uation. This occurs automatically in most restart the tyre pressure monitor again. situations, but may also be specified after restarting the tyre pressure monitor. Before restarting, check the tyres for the recom- Checking the tyre pressures mended tyre pressure. The tyre pressure monitor does not provide a Please note warning in the following cases: WARNING REven loss of pressure on multiple tyres G RSudden loss of tyre pressure, e.g. due to Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose penetration by a foreign body the following risks: RIncorrectly set tyre pressure Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow load and vehicle speed increase. warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor Rthe driving characteristics, as well as (on-board computer with a mono- steering and braking, may be greatly chrome display) impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the recommended value. Observe the recommended tyre pressure X On the multifunction lever press the ´ and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres: button repeatedly until the ° and h Rat least every two weeks symbols are displayed in the instrument cluster display. Rwhen the load changes X Press and hold the a button on the mul- Rbefore embarking on a longer journey tifunction lever. Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. The ° and h symbols flash in the off-road driving instrument cluster display for approx- imately five seconds. The two symbols If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. >> Maintenance and care. then light up. The tyre pressure monitor is restarted. G WARNING If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be over- Restarting the tyre pressure monitor loaded and malfunction, which can cause (on-board computer with colour dis- tyre pressure loss. Aftermarket tyre pres- play) sure monitoring systems will cause the tyre valve to remain open. This can also X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the recommended value. result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. X Select Settings > Tyre pressure monitor in the on-board computer. Only screw standard valve caps or valve The Tyre pressure monitor Adopt cur‐ caps specifically approved by smart for rent pressures as new reference val‐ your vehicle onto the tyre valve. ues? message appears in the display. X Select yes and press a to confirm. WARNING The display shows the Tyre pressure G monitor restarted message. If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre Using winter tyres 159

pressure that is too low may result in a tyre X Check the tyre pressure with a suitable blow-out. There is a risk of accident. tyre pressure gauge. X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. X Restart tyre pressure monitor. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, Using winter tyres contact a qualified specialist workshop. WARNING Environmental note G H M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter every 14 days. as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced.

At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle therefore to winter tyres or all-sea- son tyres marked with M+S. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. smart cannot accept responsi- The table with the recommended tyre pres- bility for this type of damage. sure for various operating conditions can be Have the vehicle winterproofed at a qualified found on the driver's side door pillar specialist workshop at the onset of winter. (B-pillar). X At low temperatures, use only winter tyres The tyre pressure table may also state air marked with M+S. pressures for different load conditions. X When road conditions are wintry, use These are defined in the table as different M+S tyres with the additional i snow- numbers of passengers and amounts of lug- flake symbol. >> Maintenance and care. gage. The actual number of seats may differ These tyres allow driving safety systems, from this. e.g. ABS, to function optimally in the win- If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the ter. tyre pressure information following is only X Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread valid for that tyre size. If tyre sizes are not on all wheels. specified, the tyre pressures stated on the X When driving with M+S tyres, observe the tyre pressure table apply for all approved specified maximum permissible speed. tyres. X Use only tyre types and sizes approved for smart. X When using tyres with a specified direc- Checking and correcting the tyre pres- tion of rotation, observe the arrow on the sure manually sidewall indicating the tyre's direction of Only check the tyre pressure once the tyres rotation. have cooled down. X Drive the vehicle less than 2 km. X Park the vehicle away from direct sunlight for at least three hours.

Z 160 Changing the window wiper blades

After fitting M+S tyres: Changing the window wiper blades Check tyre pressure. X Please note X Restart tyre pressure monitor. X If M+S tyres with a lower maximum per- WARNING missible speed than that of the vehicle are G fitted, affix an appropriate warning label If the windscreen wipers begin to move in the driver's field of vision. Using the while you are changing the wiper blades, limiter, restrict the speed to the maximum you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There permissible speed for M+S tyres. is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper Using snow chains blades.

WARNING ! Never open the service cover or tailgate if G a wiper arm has been folded away from the If you have fitted snow chains to the front windscreen or rear window. Never fold a wheels, they may scrape against the vehi- wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto cle body or chassis components. This could the windscreen or rear window. Hold the cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. wiper arm firmly when you change the There is a risk of an accident. wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the To avoid hazardous situations: window, the window may be damaged by Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels the force of the impact. Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. Changing the window wiper blades on ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snow the windscreen chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before fitting the snow chains. For safety reasons, smart recommends that >> Maintenance and care. you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by smart. Further information can be obtained at a smart centre or a qualified specialist work- shop. X Observe country-specific regulations. X Use only snow chains approved for smart. X Fit snow chains on both rear wheels. X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- screen. X Use snow chains only on snow-covered roads. X Press release clips ; on mounting ? in X When driving with snow chains fitted, do the direction of windscreen 3. The catch not exceed the maximum permissible tab is released from the mounting and the speed of 50 km/h. window wiper blades can be removed from the wiper arm. X Slide window wiper blade : in the direc- tion of arrow 5 until the securing hook for the window wiper blade is revealed. X Remove the window wiper blade. Cleaning the vehicle 161

Cleaning the vehicle Useful information Regular care maintains the appearance and quality of the vehicle over time. Observe the following when cleaning and caring for the vehicle: X Do not clean the engine. X Do not clean the vehicle whilst charging. X Use soft, moist cloths. X Use care products and cleaning agents X Slide new window wiper blade : in the recommended and approved for smart. direction of arrow 4 onto mounting = of Do not use acidic cleaning agents. wiper arm ;. X The window wiper blade snaps into place. X In winter, carefully remove road salt as soon as possible. X Check that the window wiper blade is posi- tioned correctly. X Carefully fold wiper arm ; onto the wind- screen. Cleaning the vehicle exterior Washing in an automatic car wash or washing by hand Changing the rear window wiper blade (smart fortwo coupé) Preparing the vehicle for cleaning G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic con- ditions in order to restore full braking effi- >> Maintenance and care. ciency.

X Close the side windows completely. X Switch off the climate control blower. X Remove key from ignition lock. X Turn the windscreen wipers to position 0. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win- dow until you hear it engage. Notes on care of matt paintwork X Unscrew window wiper blade ; in the ! The following can give the paint a glossy direction of the arrow until it is released appearance and thus reduce the matt from the retainer on the wiper arm. effect: X Pull out window wiper blade ;. RRubbing hard with unsuitable agents Press new window wiper blade ; onto X RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight wiper arm : until it engages. X Check that window wiper blade ; is posi- ! Only use automatic car washes which tioned correctly. correspond to the latest technological standards. Never use wash programs X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win- dow. which finish by treating the vehicle with hot wax.

Z 162 Cleaning the vehicle

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- Do not use high-pressure cleaners with ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. Have damaged tyres or chassis compo- These products are only suitable for high- gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with nents replaced immediately. matt paintwork leads to considerable sur- face damage or, more specifically, to shiny, ! Always maintain a distance of at least spotted areas. 30 cm between the vehicle and the high- Always have paintwork repairs carried out pressure cleaner nozzle. Information at a qualified specialist workshop. about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle wheels. Polishing makes the paintwork around when cleaning your vehicle. shiny. Do not aim directly at any of the following: If your vehicle has a clear matt finish, Rtyres observe these notes. By doing so, you can avoid paintwork damage due to incorrect Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. handling. Relectrical components Rbattery Washing in an automatic car wash Rconnectors X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. Rlights X Remove excess dirt. Rseals X Drive through the automatic car wash. Rventilation slots X Remove wax from the front windscreen and Damaged seals or electrical components the wiper blades. can lead to leaks or failures.

i If the windscreen wipers leave smears X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. after the vehicle has passed through the X Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm car wash, this may be caused by wax or between the high-pressure cleaner nozzle other residue. This residue can be removed and the vehicle. with washer fluid. X Keep moving the nozzle whilst cleaning. Washing by hand X Locate a washing bay equipped for hand- Cleaning the reversing camera >> Maintenance and care. washing. X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. X Apply mild cleaning agent with a soft vehicle sponge. X Thoroughly hose the vehicle with a gentle jet of water; do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille. X Dry the vehicle off with a chamois. Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt X Clean camera lens : with water and a soft grinders) can cause damage not visible cloth. from the outside to tyres or chassis com- ponents. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Cleaning the vehicle 163

Cleaning the sensors dry. The vehicle can then be parked up for a long period of time.

X Clean the wheels with an acid-free clean- ing agent.

Cleaning the windows and windscreen wipers

Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the wind- screen or wiper blades. : Active Brake Assist sensor ; Parking aid sensors X Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi- tion and fold them away from the window. X Clean sensors with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. X Clean the inside and outside of the win- dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent recommended for smart. Cleaning the wheels X Clear deposits regularly from the wind- screen and rear window to ensure that G WARNING water can drain unhindered. The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible Cleaning the window wiper blades from the outside to tyres or chassis com- X Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi- ponents. Components damaged in this way tion and fold them away from the window.

can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an X Clean the window wiper blades with a soft >> Maintenance and care. accident. cloth. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with X Fold the wiper arms back into place. circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Cleaning the panoramic roof (smart fortwo Have damaged tyres or chassis compo- coupé) nents replaced immediately. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning prod- cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. ucts to remove brake dust. This could dam- Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning age wheel bolts and brake components. cloths could scratch or damage the plastic panes of the panorama roof. Do not use ! Do not park up your vehicle for a long cleaning agents containing solvents period of time immediately after cleaning, X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic win- particularly after cleaning the wheel rim dows and wipe off with a moist sponge. with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You should therefore drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heat- ing up the brakes, the brake discs and pads

Z 164 Cleaning the vehicle

Cleaning the roof X Use silicone remover to remove wax. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, Dry cleaning oils, fuels and greases by rubbing care- fully with a cloth soaked in petroleum X Brush from the front to the back using a soft brush. ether or lighter fluid.

Wet cleaning X Dry clean first. Cleaning the vehicle interior X Wash down with a soft brush or sponge and lukewarm water. Cleaning the displays X Rinse with clean water. ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- lowing: Cleaning the soft top (smart fortwo cab- Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol rio) Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household Useful information cleaning agents ! Never clean the soft top using a high- These may damage the display surface. Do pressure cleaner as water could otherwise not put pressure on the display surface enter the vehicle interior. when cleaning. This could lead to irrepar- ! Only clean the folding roof and the rear able damage to the display. soft top when they are closed. X Switch off the display and let it cool down. X Clean the display surface with a microfibre Dry cleaning cloth and cleaner for TFT or LCD displays. Brush from the front to the back using a X X Dry the display surface using a dry micro- soft brush. fibre cloth. Wet cleaning Dry clean first. Cleaning the steering wheel and the X selector lever X Wash down with a soft brush or sponge and lukewarm water. X Wipe off with a moist cloth, or use a leather X Rinse with clean water. care agent recommended for smart. >> Maintenance and care.

Cleaning the exterior lighting Cleaning the seat belts

X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic len- WARNING ses and wipe off with a wet sponge. G Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the Cleaning and caring for paintwork seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in ! Do not affix stickers to the painted sur- an accident. There is an increased risk of face. Adhesive residue could damage the injury, possibly even fatal. paintwork. Never bleach or colour seat belts. X Remove impurities immediately by rub- bing carefully. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemi- cal cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off. belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off. X Clean the seat belts using only lukewarm X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. soapy water. Observing service due dates 165

Cleaning and caring for seats ! Never attach the following to plastic sur- faces: Please note Rstickers ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen- Rfilms uine leather or artificial leather covers, as Rperfume oil container or similar these are too aggressive and, if used often, may damage the cover. You could otherwise damage the plastic. Regular care maintains the appearance and To maintain the appearance of high-quality feel of the seats over time. plastic surfaces, do not allow surfaces to come into contact with cosmetics, insect Cleaning and caring for genuine leather repellents or sun creams. seat covers X Clean the plastic trim with a damp cloth. X Wet a cloth with water and clean the seat X Use care products and cleaning agents covers. Do not allow the leather to become recommended for smart to remove heavy soaked. soiling. Wipe off with a dry cloth. X Cleaning the roof lining (smart fortwo X Apply a leather care agent recommended for smart. coupé) X Remove heavy soiling using a soft brush or Cleaning synthetic leather seat covers a cleaning agent recommended for smart. X Wet a cloth with detergent water and clean the seat covers. Cleaning the carpets X Use carpet and textile cleaning agents rec- Cleaning cloth seat covers ommended for smart. X Wet a microfibre cloth with detergent water. Cleaning the trim elements X Rub cloth covers with care, cleaning entire sections of the cover. ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel clean- Allow the seat to dry. X ers, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a Cleaning DINAMICA seat covers risk of damaging the surface. X Clean the trim elements with a moist X Wet a cloth with water. microfibre cloth. >> Maintenance and care. X Clean entire sections of the cover. X Use care products and cleaning agents recommended for smart to remove heavy Cleaning the trim soiling.

Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Observing service due dates Care products and cleaning agents con- taining solvents can cause surfaces in the The ¯ and ° indicator lamps in the cockpit to become porous. This could result instrument cluster display are reminders of upcoming service due dates: in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of R¯: minor service. injury. R°: major service. Do not use care products and cleaning Monochrome display: the indicator lamp flashes for a few seconds after the engine is agents containing solvents to clean the started. Depending on the operating condi- cockpit. tions of the vehicle, the time or distance remaining until the service is due, is also displayed.

Z 166 Parking up the vehicle

The service interval is based on normal oper- ation of the vehicle. Observe the following if the vehicle is operated under arduous con- ditions or increased loads, e.g. regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops: X Carry out service work more often than specified by the service interval. X Check the tyres more frequently. Current information on the type of service can be obtained at a smart centre or a quali- fied specialist workshop.

Parking up the vehicle

! Please note that if the vehicle is not used for prolonged periods, vehicle damage may occur and the battery may discharge or become damaged.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop for a consultation. >> Maintenance and care. Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown 167

Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown Securing the vehicle ! When a tyre is damaged, the danger area must be kept clear of all persons.

X Stop the vehicle away from traffic on solid, non-slippery ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lights. X Turn the front wheels to the straight- ahead position. Switch off the engine. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps X manually: press button :. X Passengers should leave the vehicle. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Set up the warning triangle. Operating the emergency assistance In the event of a flat tyre, without TIREFIT the system vehicle cannot be made roadworthy again using the on-board equipment. No emer- Useful information gency call can be made via the smart Audio- System. The vehicle owner and the driver of For Russia only: the vehicle are responsible for equipping the The emergency assistance system is there to vehicle with an appropriate breakdown kit rescue you and others in an emergency. and seeking assistance in the event of a Should the driver arrive at the scene of an breakdown. accident, or feel unwell, an emergency call can be initiated. The emergency call must not be deployed in the case of a breakdown or a Switching the hazard warning lamps on similar, non-dangerous situation. and off The emergency assistance system can help to radically reduce the time between an acci- When the hazard warning lamps are dent and the arrival of the emergency serv- switched on, all the turn signal lamps flash. ices. The requirement is a stable mobile The hazard warning lamps automatically phone connection; network coverage can switch on in the following cases: depend on the region. Ran airbag is deployed. If there is no safety risk, in the event of an accident the vehicle occupants should >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a remain in the vehicle after initiating an speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a emergency call. standstill. The emergency assistance system has a sep- The hazard warning lamps switch off auto- arate battery. The battery only functions matically if a speed of 10 km/h is exceeded within a temperature range of -20 † to 85 †. again after full brake application. The battery must be replaced every four years. Always have work on the battery car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Method of operation After an emergency call has been initiated, the emergency call centre will ascertain if assistance is required on location. 168 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown

In the event of an emergency, accident data X If the voice message is correctly played is forwarded to a public emergency call back, press and hold SOS button = for five centre. seconds. The data transferred includes: Indicator lamp ? flashes green slowly. RGPS/GLONASS position data or RDirection of travel X If the voice message is incorrectly played back or not played back at all, press SOS RTime of initiation button = three times within three sec- This allows measures for rescue, recovery or onds. towing away to be initiated quickly. Indicator lamp ? flashes red slowly for The emergency assistance system consists of five seconds. a loudspeaker, the control panel and the tel- ecommunication system. The control panel is located in the overhead control panel. Automatic emergency call Indicator lamp : shows if an automatic emergency call can be initiated. If airbags are deployed, the emergency assistance system automatically notifies an emergency centre. i The automatic emergency call is opera- tional as standard.

Triggering an emergency call manually Manually initiating an emergency call as a person involved in an accident: : Automatic emergency call indicator lamp ; Microphone X Press and hold SOS button = for three sec- onds. SOS button = An emergency call is made. ? Call and reception status indicator lamp Manually initiating an emergency call after witnessing an accident: Using test mode X Press SOS button = five times within ten In test mode, the driver can check if the seconds. emergency assistance system is working. To The emergency call centre is informed of do this, a voice message from the driver is the accident. >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. recorded and the test result is transmitted to the emergency call centre. X Briefly press SOS button = several times within five seconds. X Wait for 25 seconds. X Briefly press SOS button = three times within ten seconds. A tone sounds. Microphone ; records for ten seconds. X Speak any message. A signal sounds after 25 seconds. The recorded message is played back via the loudspeaker. Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown 169

Securing the vehicle against rolling Using the warning triangle away Removing the warning triangle Securing on level ground

Warning triangle : is secured behind the X When changing a wheel, place chocks or driver's seat backrest with a Velcro fastener. other suitable items under the front and X Fold the driver's seat forwards. rear of the wheel that is diagonally oppo- Remove warning triangle :. site the wheel you wish to change. X Setting up the warning triangle Securing on a downhill gradient

X Fold feet 3 out to the side. X Place wheel chocks or other suitable items >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. in front of the wheels of the front and rear X Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a axle. triangle. X Connect the reflectors using upper stud 1. X Place the warning triangle at a suitable distance. 170 Removing the fire extinguisher

Using a reflective safety jacket also be stored in the rear door stowage com- partments. Notes on reflective safety jackets X To remove: take out the safety jacket bag containing the reflective safety jacket. X Open the safety jacket bag and take out the reflective safety jacket. X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll it up and stow it in the safety jacket bag. X Replace the safety jacket bag in stowage compartment :.

Removing the first-aid kit : Maximum number of washes Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit Maximum wash temperature i ; at least once a year. Replace the contents if = Do not bleach necessary, and replace any missing parts. ? Do not iron A Do not use a tumble dryer B Do not dry-clean C This is a class 2 jacket The reflective safety jacket only meets the requirements defined by the legal standard if it is the right size and fully closed when in use. Replace the reflective safety jacket: Rif it is damaged or there is irremovable dirt on the reflective stripes Rif you exceed the maximum number of First-aid kit : is secured behind the driv- washes er's seat backrest with a Velcro fastener. Rif the fluorescence has faded Return it to this location after use. X Fold the driver's seat forwards.

>> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Removing the reflective safety jacket X Remove first-aid kit :.

Removing the fire extinguisher

The fire extinguisher is located underneath the front passenger seat.

The reflective safety jacket is located in stowage compartment : of the front- passenger door. Reflective safety jackets can Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit 171

Removing the vehicle tool tray Please note

G WARNING In the following situations, the tyre seal- ant is unable to provide sufficient break- down assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pres- sures or on a flat tyre. The towing eye and the TIREFIT kit are loca- There is a risk of an accident. ted in the vehicle tool tray under the glove Do not drive any further. Contact a quali- compartment. fied specialist workshop. X Remove bolts in the front-passenger foot- well. G WARNING Remove the vehicle tool tray. X The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swal- Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit lowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep Useful information tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. If you come into contact with the tyre seal- TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. TIREFIT is used to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly ant, observe the following: those in the tyre tread, at outside tempera- RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin tures down to Ò20 †. immediately with water. i The tyre inflation compressor weighs RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact approximately 0.7 kg. with your eyes, immediately rinse them At a distance of approximately 60 cm from the thoroughly with clean water. tyre inflation compressor, the following

RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immedi- >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. sound pressure level applies: ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly RX-axis: 82.9 dB (A) and drink plenty of water. Do not induce RY-axis: 84.3 dB (A) vomiting, and seek medical attention RZ-axis: 84.1 dB (A) immediately. The tyre inflation compressor is mainte- RImmediately change out of clothing nance-free. If there is a malfunction, contact which has come into contact with tyre a qualified specialist workshop. sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek med- ical attention immediately.

G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is

Z 172 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

not suitable for higher speeds. There is a X Unwind plug : with the cable from tyre risk of accident. inflation compressor ;. Remove hose from the bottom section of You should therefore adapt your driving X A tyre inflation compressor ;. style accordingly and drive carefully. Do Unscrew the cap from tyre sealant bot- not exceed the specified maximum speed X tle ?. with a tyre that has been repaired using Connect hose A. tyre sealant. X

The maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plas- tic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. X Remove the valve flap from valve E on the faulty tyre. Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre infla- X Unscrew the cap from filler hose =. tion compressor. X Screw filler hose = onto valve E. X Insert connector : into the cigarette lighter socket or the 12 V socket. Filling with tyre sealant X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. X Leave foreign bodies which have penetra- ted the tyre in the tyre. X Press on/off switch B on tyre inflation compressor ; to position 1. X Remove the vehicle tool tray. The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. X Remove the TIREFIT kit, consisting of a The pressure may briefly rise to approx- tyre sealant bottle and a tyre inflation imately 600 kPa (6.0 bar/86 psi) in pressure compressor, from the vehicle tool kit. gauge C. X Affix the 80 km/h maximum speed sticker to i Preventing damage to the tyre inflation >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. the instrument cluster within the driver's compressor field of vision. Do not switch off the tyre inflation com- pressor during this phase.

X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of 15 minutes, then allow it to cool down. The tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) in pressure gauge C. Allow any leaking tyre sealant to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. Have any clothing stained with tyre sealant cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro- ethylene. Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit 173

Further procedure if the pressure of the Please note that tyre sealant may escape sealed tyre is below 180 kPa when unscrewing. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the G WARNING sealed tyre. If the specified tyre pressure still cannot X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist this instance. Damaged tyres and low tyre workshop and have the tyre changed there. pressures can significantly impair the X Have the tyre sealant bottle and filler hose vehicle's braking and driving character- replaced as soon as possible at a qualified istics. There is a risk of an accident. specialist workshop. Do not drive any further. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. Adjusting the tyre pressure X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of Increasing the tyre pressure the defective tyre. Switch on the tyre inflation compressor. Please note that tyre sealant may escape X when unscrewing. X Observe the display. X Slowly move the vehicle approximately 10 m forwards or backwards. Reducing the tyre pressure X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of 15 minutes, the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi).

Further procedure if the pressure of the sealed tyre is at least 180 kPa

X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may escape Press button : next to pressure gauge ;.

X >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. when unscrewing. i Even unused tyre sealant loses its effec- X Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre tiveness over time. inflation compressor. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every X Perform a test drive. four years at a qualified specialist work- The maximum permissible speed for a tyre shop. sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. X Stop after driving for approximately 3 km and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). The precise values are located on the door pillar (B-pillar) on the driver's side. X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve on the sealed tyre.

Z 174 Towing the vehicle

Towing the vehicle ! Observe the following points when tow- ing with a tow rope: Please note Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. WARNING G Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer Safety relevant functions are restricted or than legally permitted. Mark the tow no longer available if: rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes other road users Rthe ignition is switched off aware that a vehicle is being towed. R the brake system or power steering is Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing malfunctioning eye. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage Robserve the brake lamps of the towing supply or the vehicle's electrical system. vehicle while driving. Always maintain When your vehicle is towed, you may a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. require considerably more effort to steer Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow and brake. There is a risk of an accident. your vehicle. You could otherwise dam- In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before age the vehicle. towing away, make sure the steering ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery moves freely. purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a G WARNING crane. If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the ! When towing, pull away slowly and vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, risk of an accident. the vehicles could be damaged. Always switch on the ignition when towing ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of with a tow rope or a towing bar. 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. G WARNING For towing distances over 50 km, the entire When towing or tow-starting another vehicle must be lifted up and transported. vehicle and its weight is greater than the Observe the legal requirements for the rele- permissible gross weight of your vehicle, vant countries when towing. the: Always have the vehicle transported in the following cases: >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Rtowing eye may be torn off R Rcar/trailer combination may swerve or The warning lamp lights up and Do not tow vehicle with wheels on ground even overturn appears in the display of the instrument There is a risk of an accident. cluster. When towing or tow-starting another RThe multifunction display is not working. vehicle, its weight should not be greater ROne or more of the following warning than the permissible gross weight of your lamps is lit up: vehicle. - þ drive diagnostics (red) - # 12 V battery Information on the vehicle's permissible RThe brake pedal begins to pulsate as soon gross weight can be found on the vehicle as the towing procedure commences. identification plate ( page 202). Y RThe vehicle must be moved over a long dis- tance. The transmission must be in position i when the vehicle is being towed. Manually releasing the selector lever lock 175 i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the Towing the vehicle with both axles on automatic locking feature. The driver the ground could otherwise be locked out when push- ing or having the vehicle towed. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. i Vehicles with the basic carrier fitted: X Depress the brake pedal and keep it Do not tow the vehicle with the basic car- depressed. rier fitted. X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- Do not secure the tow rope or tow bar to the tion i. basic carrier. The selector lever lock can be manually Observe the notes on the selector lever when released in the event of an electrical mal- towing the vehicle. function. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. Fitting the towing eye X Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Transporting the vehicle ! Only secure the vehicle by the wheels or rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as the axle or steering components. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Shift the transmission to position i. As soon as the vehicle is loaded:

X Apply the parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Remove the key. X Lash down the vehicle.

Removing the towing eye

X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. X Attach the cover to the recess at the top and engage it at the bottom. X Stow the towing eye in the vehicle tool The towing eye can be attached to the front or tray. rear of the vehicle. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool tray. Manually releasing the selector lever Carefully prise off cover on the vehicle. X : lock X Screw in the towing eye to the stop. In cases of an electrical fault the selector lever lock can be manually deactivated, e.g. if the parking lock has been deactivated for towing and should subsequently be re- applied.

Z 176 Replacing the bulbs

! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to ing a bulb, you could burn yourself on prise out the cover from the centre console. these components. There is a risk of injury. Otherwise, the cover or the centre console could be damaged. Allow these components to cool down before replacing the bulb.

Observe the following rules when replacing bulbs: ROnly replace bulbs when the engine is switched off. RDo not use bulbs that have been dropped or show signs of visible damage, e.g. scratches. RDo not touch the glass bulb with your bare hands. ROnly use bulbs in enclosed lamps designed X Apply the parking brake. for that purpose. X Open the drawer on the front-passenger ROnly fit spare bulbs of the same type and side. with a specified voltage. X Prise out cover : on the centre console RDo not allow bulbs to come into contact from bottom edge ; using with a flat, with moisture. blunt object. RHave LEDs changed at qualified specialist X Pull cover : in the direction of the arrow. workshops only. Change only the bulbs described below your- self in accordance with the specified bulb types.

Replacing front bulbs Changing dipped-beam and main-beam headlamps >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. X Pull yellow release = behind the trim up and simultaneously press release but- ton ? on the selector lever. X Shift the gear selector lever to position i or j.

Replacing the bulbs Please note X Switch off the lights. X Open the service cover. G WARNING X Remove cover :. Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can X Pull out the connector. become very hot during use. When replac- X Press retainer ; inwards and to the left. X Pull the bulb out. Replacing the bulbs 177

X Insert the new bulb. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Lock retainer ;. X Refit side turn signal ;. X Insert the connector. X Replace and engage cap :. Replacing rear bulbs Replacing the front turn signal lamps Replacing the tail lamp bulbs

Tail lamps without partial LEDs

X Switch off the lights. X Turn the respective front wheel inwards. : Rear/brake lamp X Push clamp : downwards. ; Rear fog lamp X Remove cover ; upwards. = Reversing lamp X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and remove it. ? Turn signals X Remove the bulb from the bulb holder. Tail lamps with partial LEDs X Insert the new bulb. X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clock- wise until it engages. X Insert and engage cover ;.

Replacing the side turn signal lamps >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

: Turn signals ; Reversing lamp

X Carefully insert a flat tool into recess :. X Prise out side turn signal ;. X Unscrew the bulb from the bulb holder.

Z 178 Replacing the bulbs

Removing the tail lamp cover X Insert the connector. X Insert the tail lamp until you hear it engage. X Tighten the screws on the tail lamp.

Replacing the licence plate lighting

X Switch off the lights. X smart fortwo coupé: open the upper and lower tailgate. X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tail- gate. smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft top X Insert a flat tool into recess :. up. X X Remove the cover from the licence plate X Loosen screws :. lamp. X Remove the tail lamp. X Remove the bulb from the holder. X Carefully insert a flat tool under the plas- Insert the new bulb into the holder. tic hanger on the tail lamp. X X Insert the lamp lens into the licence plate X Lift the connector and remove it. lamp. Replacing a faulty tail lamp bulb Replacing the interior lighting >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

: Rear lamp/brake lamp (vehicles without partial LEDs) Turn signals ; X Insert a flat tool into the recess. Reversing lamp = X Prise out lamp lens :. ? Rear fog lamp (vehicles without partial Remove the bulb from the holder. LEDs) X X Insert the new bulb into the holder. Release four tabs A on the bulb holder. X X Refit the lamp lens. X Remove the bulb holder. X Pull the faulty bulb out. X Insert the new bulb. X Refit the bulb holder. Changing fuses 179

Changing fuses Please note

G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amper- age, the electric cables could be overloa- ded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. X Open the front-passenger door. X Open the glove compartment. ! Only use fuses that have been approved X To open: open cover : in the direction of for smart vehicles and which have the cor- the arrow. rect fuse rating for the system concerned. Components or systems could otherwise be X Replace the faulty fuse. damaged. X To close: insert and fold in cover : until it engages. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the Close the glove compartment. fuse box when the cover is open. X The electrical fuses disconnect defective cir- cuits. If a fuse blows, all the connected com- ponents and their functions will fail. Replacing a fuse (right-hand drive Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of vehicle) the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart (Y page 205). If new fuses blow, the cause for this must be diagnosed and rectified at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Preparing the vehicle to change a fuse >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. X Apply the parking brake. Switch off all electrical consumers. X X Open the driver’s door. Turn the key to position u in the ignition X X To open: turn quick-release fastener ; by lock and remove it. 90° using a suitable object. X Check whether all indicator lamps in the Fold down cover :. instrument cluster are off. X X Replace the faulty fuse. X To close: close cover :. Replacing a fuse (left-hand drive vehi- X Close quick-release fastener ;. cle) ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dash- board. You could damage the dashboard or the cover.

Z 180 Opening a door with the emergency release

Replacing the key battery

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub- stances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. X Insert a flat tool, e.g. a coin, into the recess. H Environmental note X Turn the tool until the cover of the battery Batteries contain pollu- tray opens. tants. It is illegal to dis- pose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected sepa- rately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling sys- tem. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally respon- sible manner. Take dis- charged batteries to a X Replace battery ; with the positive ter- qualified specialist work- minal facing upwards. shop or to a collection X Replace the cover on the battery tray and point for used batteries. push it closed. X Fixed keys: screw in screw :. X Check the function of all key buttons. >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Opening a door with the emergency release

X Fixed keys: unscrew screw :. Locking the doors in an emergency 181

If the vehicle cannot be opened using the The doors, tailgate and socket cap are remote control key, the vehicle can be opened locked. The anti-theft alarm system is using the emergency release. primed. If the driver's door is unlocked and opened X From the outside, check that the doors, with the key in the emergency release, the tailgate and socket cap are locked. anti-theft alarm system will issue an alarm. To disable the alarm, switch on the ignition. X Carefully remove the cover from the emer- Locking the doors with the emergency gency release. locking X Insert the key into the emergency release on the driver's door. X Turn the key anti-clockwise. X Remove the key from the lock. X Push the cover into the emergency release until it engages. X Open the door. X To disable the alarm from the anti-theft alarm system: switch on the ignition. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the emer- gency release is located on the front- passenger door. X Insert the key into slot : on the left door. X Turn the key towards the bonnet as far as it Locking the doors in an emergency will go to position 2. X Close the left door. Locking the doors with the locking but- X Repeat the procedure described above on ton the right door. X Check that the doors are locked. i If you lock the vehicle using emergency locking, the tailgate and socket cap are not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed. >> Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

X Open the driver’s door. X Close the other doors and the tailgate. X Press and hold button :. An audible lock- ing and unlocking sound can be heard. Wait until the third (locking) sound, before releasing button :. X Leave the vehicle and close the driver's door.

Z 182 Locking and unlocking

Notes on display messages Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the display. The display shows warnings, malfunctions or additional information. A warning tone Colour display: low-priority display mes- also sounds with some display messages. sages can be hidden by pressing a on the steering wheel. High-priority messages are Messages from all categories can contain shown in red. The display messages are then important information that must be stored in the message memory and can be observed. Have error messages checked at a called up for as long as the ignition remains Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as soon as switched on. Switching off the ignition clears possible. If an error message is not followed the message memory. up with a repair, this can lead to damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty including injuries or material damage.

Locking and unlocking

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Key will not lock or A strong source of radio waves is interfering with the signal. unlock the vehicle. X Stand closer to the door lock and try to lock/unlock the vehicle again. Key battery is low or discharged. X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency release or lock the vehicle with emergency locking. X Replace the key battery.

Key is faulty. To lock: X Press the locking button and close the door within five seconds. The vehicle still will not lock. X Lock driver's door using emergency locking. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. To unlock:

>> Practical advice. X Unlock vehicle with the key in the emergency release. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Key is lost. X Have the key deactivated or replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report loss of the key to vehicle insurer.

Warning tone sounds. Driver's door is opened while the engine is running. Switch off the engine before leaving the vehicle:

X Apply the parking brake. X Select transmission position j. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock and remove it. Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag 183

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Side window will not Objects are obstructing the window guide. close or will not open or Remove objects. close fully. X Side window is not reset. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.

X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the switch for closing the window until the window is closed, and then push the switch for one second. The side window opens again a little way. X Repeat previous step until the window remains closed after releasing the switch.

C Red warning lamp Door or tailgate is open. is lit. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and If the speed exceeds traffic conditions. 20 km/h, a warning Close all doors and the tailgate. tone also sounds. X Colour display: the dis- play shows an open door/tailgate.

Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The exterior mirror is The exterior mirror has been moved forwards or backwards by not engaged. force. >> Practical advice. X Carefully move the exterior mirror to the correct position.

The windscreen wipers The windscreen wipers are obstructed, e.g. by snow. have malfunctioned. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Remove the key from ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers on again after 30 seconds.

Z 184 Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The windscreen wipers The combination switch or rain sensor is malfunctioning. will not stop or always X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and wipe at the same speed. traffic conditions.

X Remove the key from ignition lock.

X Insert the key into the ignition lock, turn to position 1 and start the engine.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red 7 warning The warning lamp prompts the driver and front passenger to fas- lamp lights up for 6 ten their seat belts. seconds after starting Fasten the seat belts. the engine (certain X countries only). A warning tone sounds. The red 7 warning The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. lamp lights up after Fasten the seat belts. starting the engine. X The red 7 warning The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and lamp flashes. the vehicle is travelling faster than 20 km/h. A warning tone sounds. X Fasten the seat belts. The red 6 warning The restraint system is malfunctioning. lamp lights up while the engine is running. G WARNING Colour display: Mal‐ If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system function Visit work‐ components may be triggered unintentionally or may not shop appears. deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

>> Practical advice. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

The 4 indicator The front-passenger front airbag has been disabled (Y page 40). lamp on the overhead Enable the front-passenger front airbag. control panel lights up. X The front-passenger front airbag has not been disabled and is malfunctioning. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. X Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine, brakes, transmission 185

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The × indicator Front-passenger front airbag is enabled (Y page 40). The airbag lamp on the overhead system is operating correctly. control panel lights up. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.

The × indicator There is a malfunction in the airbag system. lamp on the overhead Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat. control panel does not X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. light up if the front- X passenger front airbag has been enabled man- ually.

Engine, brakes, transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine will not The steering lock is manually locked. start using the key. X Remove the key from the ignition lock and then reinsert it into the ignition lock. X Turn the key. X Turn the steering wheel left and right.

The red þ warning There is a serious malfunction in the high-voltage electrical sys- lamp lights up. tem. A warning tone sounds. The engine can no longer be started. Without starting X Do not restart the engine. motor again, visit X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. workshop appears. The red þ warning The high-voltage electrical system, engine or high-voltage bat- lamp lights up. tery is malfunctioning. Stop Switch off X Switch off the engine. motor appears. X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X >> Practical advice. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. The red þ warning Communication with the engine's control unit is malfunctioning. lamp lights up. X Switch off the engine. A warning tone sounds. X Do not drive on. Stop appears. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels.

Z 186 Engine, brakes, transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow þ warn- There is a malfunction in the high-voltage electrical system. The ing lamp lights up. vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may become damaged if A warning tone sounds. you continue running the engine. Malfunction Visit X Switch off the engine. workshop appears. X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. The red þ warning The speed of the vehicle is above 135 km/h. lamp lights up. X Reduce the speed to below 135 km/h. A warning tone sounds. Reduce speed appears.

lights up. The drive system or high-voltage electrical system is faulty. Do not tow vehicle X Have the vehicle transported by a qualified specialist work- with wheels on shop. ground appears. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. The red J warning Brake fluid level is too low. lamp lights up while the engine is running. G WARNING A warning tone sounds. If the brake fluid level is too low the brake system may fail. Colour display: Check There is a risk of an accident. brake fluid level Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. appears. Secure the vehicle by applying the parking brake. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immedi- ately and have the brake system repaired.

Do not top up the brake fluid, as this will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The red J warning The parking brake is applied. lamp lights up while Release the parking brake. driving. X A warning tone sounds.

>> Practical advice. Colour display: Release parking brake appears. The red J warning There is a serious malfunction in the brake system. lamp lights up while Consult a qualified specialist workshop. the engine is running. X A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Brake system malfunction Stop appears. Charging process 187

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow J warn- There is a malfunction in the vacuum supply of the brake system. ing lamp lights up. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: Mal‐ function Visit work‐ shop appears. Monochrome display: An attempt was made to start the engine with the transmission in i or j flash alter- position h or k. nately in the middle of Shift to j or i to start. the display. X Colour display: To start engine: shift to P or N appears. Monochrome display: The driver's door is open and the selector lever is in position k, j or h/k, i flash i or h. alternately. A warning tone sounds. G WARNING Colour display: Risk The vehicle may roll away. of vehicle rolling There is a risk of an accident. away Transmission X Shift to position j. not in P appears. Switch off the engine. A warning tone sounds. X X Close the driver's door completely. ¯ or ° warning A service due date is approaching or has already passed: lamp flashes for a few R¯ indicates a minor service. seconds after starting the engine. R° indicates a full service. Colour display: Next X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. service due in … km or Service due … days ago appears.

Charging process

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions >> Practical advice. The charge socket flap The charge socket flap is not unlocked. cannot be opened. X Press the # button on the key. The key batteries are discharged. X Opening a door with the emergency release The charging cable The vehicle socket is locked. cannot be plugged into Make sure that the selector lever is in position j. the vehicle socket. X

Z 188 Charging process

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp on A fault occurred while initializing the charging process. the vehicle socket X Make sure that the charging cable is plugged into the mains flashes red. The high- socket. voltage battery is not being charged. X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket and plug it back into the vehicle socket after 30 seconds. X If the malfunction should persist, inform a qualified specialist workshop. The indicator lamp on There is a malfunction at the mains socket. the vehicle socket X Have the mains socket checked to ensure that it is working remains off after the correctly. charging cable con- nector has been con- or nected to the vehicle X Use a different mains socket. socket. When charging using a mains socket, the high-voltage bat- tery is not charged. è lights up. The charging cable is plugged into the vehicle socket. The engine Warning tone sounds. cannot be started. Charger cable con‐ X Before driving off, disconnect the charging cable from the nected appears. vehicle socket and stow it away in the vehicle. è flashes. The charge cable is connected to the vehicle socket. The battery is Charging cable not not being charged. inserted correctly X Make sure that the charging cable is correctly plugged into the appears. sockets on the vehicle and power connection. If necessary, dis- connect the charging cable from the sockets and then reconnect it. If the message continues to be displayed:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The charging cable The charging cable connector is not unlocked. connector cannot be X Press the # button on the key. removed from the vehi- This unlocks the charging cable connector in the vehicle cle socket. socket. >> Practical advice. X Remove charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. Charging not possi‐ The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. The charge current ble Power supply was interrupted during the charging process. interrupted appears. X Make sure that the charging cable is plugged into the mains socket. X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket and plug it back into the vehicle socket after 30 seconds. If the message continues to be displayed:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Charging process 189

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Charging not possi‐ Communication with the charging point infrastructure is not ble s. Owner's Man‐ functioning correctly. ual appears. X Make sure that the charging cable is correctly plugged into the sockets on the vehicle and power connection. If necessary, dis- connect the charging cable from the sockets and then reconnect it. If the message continues to be displayed:

X Use a different charging station. If the message continues to be displayed:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. þ Yellow warning The vehicle electronics are malfunctioning. The high-voltage lamp lights up. battery cannot be charged. Charging not possi‐ X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ble Visit workshop appears. þ Yellow warning The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. The charging cable lamp lights up. connector is overheated. Charging not possi‐ X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. ble s. Owner's Man‐ X Allow the charging cable connector to cool off for several ual appears. minutes. X Plug the charging cable back into the vehicle socket. If the message continues to be displayed:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The indicator lamp on The vehicle is inactive. the vehicle socket does X Activate the vehicle by pressing the # button on the key and not light up. The high- lock it again. voltage battery is not being charged. The charging cable The vehicle is in charging mode or has completed active charging. cannot be removed. X Unlock the charging lock by pressing the # button on the key. >> Practical advice.

Z 190 Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! Yellow warning ABS is malfunctioning. Other driving systems may be deactiva- lamp lights up. ted. Colour display: System If ABS is faulty, there is also a possibility that other driving sys- inoperative appears. tems may be unavailable. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steer- ability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the infor- mation on the ABS warning lamp and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

J Red warning lamp EBD is malfunctioning. This means that ABS, ESP®, Crosswind lights up while the Assist and Hill start assist are also unavailable. engine is running. Other driving systems may be deactivated. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Brake G WARNING force distribution The brake system continues to function normally, but without the inoperative. Stop functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock early if See Owner's Manual you brake hard, for example. appears. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely >> Practical advice. affected. The braking distance may increase in emergency brak- ing situations. If ESP® is not operational, the vehicle will not be stabilised by ESP®. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems 191

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ Monochrome dis- ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Other driving systems play: yellow warning may be deactivated. lamp lights up while the engine is running. G WARNING ÷ Colour display: If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehi- yellow warning lamp cle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. lights up. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. System inoperative ® appears. Drive on carefully. Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Brake lamps may be inoperative and thus no longer working when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not drive on. X Check that the brake lamps are working. The brake lamps are not working.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Brake lamps are working.

X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ Colour display: The Brake Assist System (BAS) is inoperative. yellow warning lamp Consult a qualified specialist workshop. lights up. X Brake Assist System (BAS) inoperative appears. ÷ Yellow warning ESP® is intervening because there is a risk of skidding or at least lamp flashes while one of the wheels is spinning. driving. X Pull away carefully. X Accelerate carefully whilst driving. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather condi- tions. >> Practical advice. ÷ and C and Central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. other warning lamps After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or are lit. unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the Colour display: Elec‐ engine. tronics malfunction X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and Visit workshop traffic conditions. appears. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 192 Driving safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Colour display: ÷ Hill start assist is malfunctioning. Vehicle will not be held auto- Hill start assist matically when pulling away uphill and may start rolling imme- inoperative appears. diately. G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehi- cle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Other driving systems may be deactivated. The brake system functions normally, but without hill start assist.

X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. h Yellow warning The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre lamp lights up while pressure difference between the wheels is too great. driving. X Check tyre pressure. Colour display: Cor‐ X Correct the tyre pressure. rect tyre pressure Restart tyre pressure monitor. appears. X >> Practical advice. Driving safety systems 193

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Yellow warning The tyre pressure monitor has detected a significant loss of pres- lamp lights up while sure in at least one of the tyres. driving. WARNING Colour display: Tyre G pressure Caution Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: tyre malfunction Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed appears. increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres: Rat least every two weeks Rwhen the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Check tyres visually and, if necessary, follow the instructions for flat tyres. X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary. h Yellow warning The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning or was not restarted lamp flashes for after a wheel change. approximately one minute and then stays G WARNING lit. If you correct the tyre pressure without recalibrating the Run Colour display: Tyre Flat Indicator, the system cannot issue a warning about a pressure monitor defective tyre in time. In the event of tyre pressure loss, the inoperative appears. driving characteristics and the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. >> Practical advice. If you correct the tyre pressure, you must recalibrate the Run Flat Indicator.

X Restart tyre pressure monitor. The display message continues to be displayed.

X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 194 Driving safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Yellow warning There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more lamp flashes for wheels. approximately 60 seconds and then G WARNING remains lit. Risk of accident due to undetected tyre pressure losses. The sys- Colour display: Tyre tem is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure. pressure monitor X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. inoperative wheel sensors missing Wheels have unsuitable tyre pressure sensors. appears. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. J Red warning lamp The following systems are malfunctioning: is lit. RABS (anti-lock braking system) ÷, ! yellow RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) warning lamps light up while the engine is RCrosswind Assist running. RHill start assist Warning tone sounds. Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. Colour display: Elec‐ WARNING tronics malfunction G Stop See Owner's The risk of skidding and having an accident increases due to Manual appears. malfunctioning driving safety systems. The brake system functions normally, but without the systems listed. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. This will greatly impair the ability to steer and brake. The brak- ing distance may increase in emergency braking situations. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. >> Practical advice. Driver assistance systems 195

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Monochrome display: Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering diffi- D yellow warning cult. lamp lights up while the engine is running. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely:

X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely:

X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

D Yellow warning Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering diffi- lamp lights up while cult. the engine is running. WARNING Colour display: Steer‐ G ing malfunction See You will need to use more force to steer. Owner's Manual There is a risk of an accident. or X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. Electronics mal‐ function See Own‐ If you are able to steer safely: er's Manual appears. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely:

X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driver assistance systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions >> Practical advice. · Red warning lamp Collision warning detects an obstacle on the road. is lit. X Pay careful attention to the road and traffic conditions and be Warning tone sounds. ready to brake.

· Red warning lamp Distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the current speed. is lit. X Increase the distance. ^ Yellow warning The sensors in the radiator trim are dirty. lamp lights up while Clean the sensors. driving. X Colour display: Active Brake Assist inoper‐

Z 196 Driver assistance systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ative or Electronics Environmental influences or error sources outside the system are malfunction Visit temporarily interfering with Active Brake Assist and radar- workshop appears. assisted recuperation. Possible causes: Rheavy rain or snow Roperating temperature is too high Ron-board voltage is too low Active Brake Assist is automatically operational again when the causes listed no longer apply. Warning lamp remains lit:

X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Clean the sensors. X Restart the engine. Warning lamp still remains lit:

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ^ and C as well Central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. as other warning lamps After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or are lit. unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ã flashes for Windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. approximately three X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and seconds. traffic conditions. Warning tone sounds. X Clean the windscreen. Colour display: Lane Keeping Assist inop‐ Environmental influences are interfering with Lane Keeping erative appears. Assist. Possible causes: Rheavy rain or snow or thick fog is impairing visibility Rthe sun is low in the sky and shining directly onto the sensor

>> Practical advice. Rlane markings cannot be detected Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when the causes listed no longer apply. If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed do not apply, then the electronics are malfunctioning. System electronics are faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driver assistance systems 197

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¤ flashes for a max- A lane boundary marking was crossed without using the turn imum of five seconds. signal. Colour display: the X Stay inside the lane boundary markings. green à warning X Use indicator before changing lanes. lamp flashes for a max- imum of five seconds. Warning tone sounds. ¯ flashes for Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically. approximately ten sec- Consult a qualified specialist workshop. onds. X Warning tone sounds. Colour display: ¯ Cruise control inop‐ erative appears. ¯ flashes for Central vehicle electronics system and cruise control are mal- approximately ten sec- functioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer pos- onds. C and other sible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on the warning lamps are also key or to start the engine. lit. X Pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to Warning tone sounds. road and traffic conditions. Colour display: Elec‐ X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. tronics malfunction Visit workshop appears. È lights up. Vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed. Speed display flashes. X Brake the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic condi- Warning tone sounds. tions.

È flashes for Speed limiter is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically. approximately ten sec- Consult a qualified specialist workshop. onds. X Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Lim‐ iter inoperative appears. >> Practical advice. Ò warning lamp The outside temperature has fallen to or below 3 °C. There is a risk flashes for a minute or of black ice. lights up continuously. X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather condi- Colour display: Black tions. ice warning appears.

Z 198 Battery, lights, heating

Battery, lights, heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Rear window heating Battery is not sufficiently charged. or seat heating Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. switches off automati- X cally or cannot be switched on. Ý Yellow warning The charge status of the high-voltage battery has dropped into lamp lights up. the reserve range. Battery reserve X Charge the high-voltage battery. level appears. Monochrome display: Charge status of the high-voltage battery is below 10 %. Ý Yellow warning Charge the high-voltage battery. lamp flashes. X Colour display: Ý Yellow warning lamp lights up. Battery reserve level appears. õ Display flashes. The vehicle has switched itself off because the charge status of The vehicle has the high-voltage battery is too low. After restarting the vehicle, switched itself off. depending on the charge status of the high-voltage battery, the Battery charge too vehicle can only drive on a maximum of 1 km. low Charge HV bat‐ X Park the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic condi- tery now appears. tions. X Charge the high-voltage battery.

# Red warning lamp 12 V battery is not being charged or the high-voltage battery is lights up when driving malfunctioning. or when the vehicle is X Do not drive on. ready to start. The engine may switch itself off after a short while. Warning tone sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and Colour display: Stop traffic conditions. See Owner's Manual X Switch off the engine.

>> Practical advice. appears. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. It may not be possible to drive the vehicle further and it may not be possible to restart the engine.

Colour display: # Battery monitoring is malfunctioning. Warning lamp lights Consult a qualified specialist workshop. up. X Malfunction Visit workshop appears. Monochrome display: Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activated. b Warning lamp Switch off the engine. lights up. X X Start the engine. Battery, lights, heating 199

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Warning lamp remains lit. Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty. G WARNING Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps. The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning lamp still remains lit. Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. X Manually adjust exterior lighting. X Manually adjust windscreen wipers. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: b Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activated. Warning lamp lights Switch off the engine. up. X X Restart the engine. Malfunction See Own‐ er's Manual appears. Warning lamp remains lit. Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. X Manually adjust exterior lighting. X Manually adjust windscreen wipers. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: b Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty. Warning lamp lights up. G WARNING Brake lamps inoper‐ Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps. ative appears. The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. >> Practical advice. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: Switch Lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. off lights appears. X Turn control knob for the lights to à or u. Warning tone sounds.

Z 200 smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

smart Audio-System and smart Media-System Bluetooth® connection

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

® Bluetooth connection X Ascertain whether the mobile phone is compatible with the cannot be established system. Information about compatible mobile phones: between the smart www.smart.com/connect Audio-System or smart X Check the security settings on your mobile phone. Media-System and ® X Check that the Bluetooth function is enabled on the smart mobile phone. Audio-System or smart Media-system and on your mobile phone. X Start the device search on the smart Audio-System or smart Media-System and on the mobile phone.

Navigation system in the smart Media-System

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions No map is displayed in The SD card with the map data is missing or damaged. the navigation system. X Check to see that the SD card is inserted. Position of the vehicle GPS reception is poor. in the navigation sys- X Drive the vehicle to another position where GPS reception is tem does not match the better. vehicle's actual posi- tion. GPS symbol on the dis- play is grey or yellow. The road's course in the The map data is out of date. navigation system no Update the map data. longer coincides with X the actual road. Navigation system Route guidance has not been started. does not display any Select a destination and start navigation. traffic information. X >> Practical advice. HD Traffic is not available or the subscription for HD Traffic has expired. X Check whether HD Traffic is available for the country you are in or upgrade the subscription for HD Traffic. There are no naviga- The road's course is not detected. The map data may be out of date. tion messages during Check if route guidance has started. route guidance. X X If not, select a destination and start navigation. Navigation messages are switched off. X Switch on navigation messages. smart Audio-System and smart Media-System 201

Voice control system in the smart Media-System

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The voice control sys- The interval for entering voice commands has been exceeded. tem does not under- stand voice commands. X Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Voice commands have not been given from the driver's seat. X Issue voice commands from the driver's seat. Noise from the blower or wind noise are interfering with voice commands. X Avoid interfering noises. Voice commands have not been given clearly. X Speak clearly when giving voice commands. A voice command is unknown. X Enter voice command "Help". A list of possible voice commands appears. >> Practical advice.

Z 202 Reading vehicle data

Obtaining technical data

Information on technical data: www.smart.de The technical data was determined in accordance with EC Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. Differences will be present in the case of vehicles with optional equipment. Further information is available from any smart Centre. : Vehicle identification plate Paint code Reading vehicle data ; = Vehicle manufacturer Useful information ? EU type approval number Vehicle identification number (VIN) Deviations from specified data: A B Maximum permissible gross weight RThe heights and lengths specified vary as C Maximum permissible front axle load a result of: D Maximum permissible rear axle load - tyres - load i The data shown on the vehicle identifi- - condition of the suspension cation plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate - optional equipment from the data shown here. The data appli- RItems of optional equipment reduce the cable to the vehicle is found on the vehi- maximum payload cle's identification plate. RVehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate Vehicle identification number (VIN) ROnly for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORM- ITY). These documents are delivered with your vehicle.

Vehicle identification plate >> Technical data.

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear- most position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. VIN ; is located there. The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate.

: Vehicle identification plate position Reading vehicle data 203

Dimensions and weights smart EQ fortwo cabrio Dimensions and Missing technical data was not available at weights the time of going to print. Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors for vehicles equipped with wheel trims Vehicle height 1553 mm Wheelbase 1873 mm Maximum ground clear- 110 mm ance Maximum tailgate load without side bars Maximum tailgate load smart EQ fortwo Dimensions and with sidebars weights Permissible roof load 0 kg Opening height : 1855 mm Vehicle length 2695 mm Charging time Vehicle width including 1893 mm exterior mirrors i The options listed for charging a high- voltage battery are not available in all Vehicle width excluding 1663 mm countries. exterior mirrors Vehicle width excluding High-voltage battery exterior mirrors for Type Lithium-ion vehicles equipped with wheel trims Vehicles with a 7 kW / 4.6 kW on-board Vehicle height 1555 mm charger Wheelbase 1873 mm Charging time Approx. 2 h Maximum ground clear- 113 mm (from 0% to 80%) 30 min ance at 32 A / 230 V Maximum tailgate load Charging time Approx. 3 h (from 0% to 80%) 30 min Permissible roof load 0 kg at 20 A / 230 V

Charging time Approx. 7 h >> Technical data. smart EQ fortwo cabrio Dimensions and 30 min weights (from 0% to 80%) at 10 A / 230 V Vehicle length 2695 mm Vehicle width including 1893 mm exterior mirrors Vehicle width excluding 1663 mm exterior mirrors 204 Bulb types

High-voltage battery Vehicle components and their respective service products must match. Therefore, only Charging time Approx. 9 h use products tested and approved by (from 0% to 80%) 30 min Mercedes-Benz.

at 8 A / 230 V Vehicles with a 22 kW on- Approx. 45 min Information on service products board charger Charging time The following table lists all technical data for the service products of the vehicle. Fur- (from 0% to 80%) ther information on service products: http:// at 3x32 A / 230 V bevo.mercedes-benz.com and in any smart centre. Service prod- Specifications Charging cable ucts Charging the battery at a charging station Corrosion Recommended: G40 or wall box inhibitor/ antifreeze Nominal voltage max. 400 V AC, (Y page 152) max. 3-phase Windscreen Temperatures above Nominal frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz washer fluid freezing point: mixing (Y page 153) ratio of 1:100 Nominal current max. 32 A MB SummerFit to water. Charge output from 4.6 kW to Temperatures below 22 kW freezing point: for the cor- rect mixing ratio of System of protection IP44 (inserted), MB WinterFit and water, IP24 (not inser- please observe the infor- ted) mation on the antifreeze Outside temperature -40 † to +50 † container. Observe the notes on maintaining the high- voltage bat- Bulb types tery(Y page 75) Standards IEC 61851-1, The following table lists the correct bulb IEC 62196-1, types of the vehicle: IEC 62186-2 Bulb Type Interface Type 2 to Type Dipped-beam/main-beam H4 60/55 W 2 headlamps >> Technical data. Also observe the identification plate on the Front foglamps H 16 charging cable connector. Turn signals PY 21 W Side turn signal lamps WY 5 W Service products Licence plate lighting W 5 W Please note Interior lighting W 5 W Also observe the information in the section "Checking and refilling service products" (Y page 152). Fuse allocation 205

Tail lamps Bulb Type Bulb Type Reversing lamp W 16 W Tail lamp and brake lamp P21 5 W Turn signals PY 21 W Rear foglamp P21 W

Fuse allocation

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 1 Starter motor 5 A Brown 2 Power steering control unit 5 A Brown 3 Multifunction lever 5 A Brown 4 Airbag 5 A Brown 5 ‑ ‑ ‑ 6 Instrument cluster 10 A Red 7 Horn, alarm system 15 A Blue >> Technical data. 8 Power supply control unit 10 A Red 9 Power supply control unit 10 A Red 10 Central control unit 20 A Yellow 11 Central control unit 15 A Blue 12 Central control unit 10 A Red 13 Central control unit 15 A Blue 206 Fuse allocation

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 14 Power window switch (without reversing func- 30 A Green tion) 15 ESP®, transmission control unit 5 A Brown 16 Interior lighting 10 A Red 17 Immobiliser 3 A Violet 18 Electrical exterior mirror 5 A Brown 19 Brake lamps 10 A Red 20 Cruise control, radio, belt warning 15 A Blue 21 Not for smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, 15 A Blue smart EQ forfour: central control unit, fuel pump, ignition system 22 Rear window wiper 15 A Blue 23 Starter motor 40 A Orange smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: power supply control unit 24 ‑ ‑ ‑ 25 Power supply control unit 30 A Green 26 Radio 20 A Yellow 27 Daytime driving lamps 5 A Brown 28 12 V socket, cigarette lighter 15 A Blue 29 Power supply control unit 5 A Brown 30 Forward collision warning 15 A Blue 31 ‑ ‑ ‑ 32 Radio, central control unit 15 A Blue 33 Tail lamps, front foglamps, hazard warning lamp 25 A Cyan button, locking button, headlamp range control, power windows, licence plate lighting, radio,

>> Technical data. control unit for heating or climate control system, cruise control, limiter, parking aid button, pro- gram selector button, tailgate release, Lane Keep- ing Assist camera, automatic start/stop system button 34 Power supply control unit 25 A Cyan 35 Headlamps, daytime driving lamps 25 A Cyan 36 - 40 ‑ ‑ ‑ 41 smart EQ forfour only: seat heating in the rear 15 A Blue Radio type approvals for the tyre pressure monitors 207

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 42 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ 25 A Cyan forfour only: seat heating in the front 43 Mirror heating 5 A Brown 44 Power windows (automatic reversing feature) 25 A Cyan 45 Transmission control unit 5 A Brown smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: EQ control unit 46 Radio amplifier 20 A Yellow 47 ‑ ‑ ‑ 48 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ 10 A Red forfour only: vacuum pump 49 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ 10 A Red forfour only: heating control unit, air-condition- ing

Radio type approvals for the tyre pres- Country Radio type approval number sure monitors Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitter Country Radio type approval number Type Approval Number: Argen- MW2433A TRC/LPD/2012/114 tina H-12337 Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92 MHz. GG4 Type Approval Number: H-12338 TRC/LPD/2012/190 Brazil 2770-12-8001 Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4 Model: MW2433A Type Approval Number: 0381-13-8001 TRC/LPD/2011/158 Model: GG4 Type Number: LPD Abu TRA, Registered-NO Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012 Dhabi ER0092100/12 MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012 Dubai TRA, Registered-NO MR6706 ANRT 2011 ER0099792/12 >> Technical data. Moldova 1024 TRA, Registered-NO ER0076990/11 Philip- No: ESD-1206394C Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10 pines No: ESD-1306871C Serbia И 011 12 208 Installing two-way radios and mobile phones

Country Radio type approval number vehicle's operating permit may be invali- dated. Singa- Compliance with IDA Standard The operating permit may be invalidated pore DA- 103365 ! if the instructions for installation and use South TA-2012/719 of two-way radios are not observed. Africa TA-2012/1540 In particular, the following conditions TA-2011/1370 must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used Robserve the maximum permissible out- Installing two-way radios and mobile put in these wavebands phones Ronly approved aerial positions may be used WARNING Excessive levels of electromagnetic radia- G tion can cause damage to health. The use of The electromagnetic radiation from two- an exterior aerial takes into consideration way radios can interfere with the vehicle the scientific discussion surrounding the electronics if they are manipulated or ret- possible health risk posed by electromag- rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardise netic fields. the operating safety of the vehicle. There is The following aerial positions may be used a risk of an accident. for the correct installation of two-way radios: You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in the vehicle, their electromagnetic radi- ation can interfere with the vehicle elec- tronics, for example if: Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial : Front roof area Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly moun- Rear roof area ted or is not low-reflection ; This could jeopardise the operating safety Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for instal- of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. lation of aftermarket radio frequency trans- Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fit- mitting equipment") when retrofitting two- ted at a qualified specialist workshop. way radios. Comply with the legal require- >> Technical data. When operating two-way radios in the ments for add-on parts. vehicle, always connect them to the low- If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio reflection exterior aerial. equipment, use the power supply and aerial connections intended for use in the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Have the engine electronics and parts ! additional instructions during installation. belonging to it such as control units, sen- sors, actuating components or electric Deviations with respect to wavebands, max- cables maintained only at a qualified spe- imum transmission outputs or aerial posi- cialist workshop. Otherwise, vehicle com- tions must be approved by smart. ponents may wear more quickly and the Installing two-way radios and mobile phones 209

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum transmission output Tetra 20 W 380 - 410 MHz Mobile communications 6 W generation 2G/3G/4G

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: Rtwo-way radios with a maximum trans- mission output of up to 100 mW Rmobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: Rtetra Rmobile communications (2G/3G/4G) >> Technical data.

Z 210 211 212 Publication details Internet

Further information about smart vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.smart.com http://www.daimler.com

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documen- tation team at the following address: Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany

As at 04.09.2017 6522 0284 02 453 584 43 14 Edition ÄJ2017-1c Order no. Part no. 4535844314 É4535844314[ËÍ

www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand